04.04.2014 Views

ncr/doc/Kiosks/TechnicalManuals/7401_Kiosk_Har... - Alsys Data

ncr/doc/Kiosks/TechnicalManuals/7401_Kiosk_Har... - Alsys Data

ncr/doc/Kiosks/TechnicalManuals/7401_Kiosk_Har... - Alsys Data

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

NCR<br />

NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong><br />

Release 2.5<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Userʹs Guide<br />

1979<br />

B005‐0000‐1254<br />

Issue H


The product described in this book is a licensed product of NCR Corporation.<br />

NCR is a registered trademark of NCR Corporation.<br />

NCR RealPOS, NCR RealPrice, NCR RealScan, NCR EasyPoint and NCR FastLane are either registered<br />

trademarks or trademarks of NCR Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.<br />

MicroTouch is a registered trademark of MicroTouch.<br />

NCR and EasyPoint are registered trademarks of NCR Corporation.<br />

Novell and Netware are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.<br />

Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.<br />

Power Mon II is a registered trademark of Systems Enhancement Corporation.<br />

Sound Blaster is a registered trademark of Creative Technology, Ltd.<br />

SoundFusion is a registered trademark of Cirrus Logic, Inc.<br />

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.<br />

Symantic and Ghost are registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation in the United States and other<br />

countries.<br />

It is the policy of NCR Corporation (NCR) to improve products as new technology, components, software, and<br />

firmware become available. NCR, therefore, reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice.<br />

All features, functions, and operations described herein may not be marketed by NCR in all parts of the world.<br />

In some instances, photographs are of equipment prototypes. Therefore, before using this <strong>doc</strong>ument, consult<br />

with your NCR representative or NCR office for information that is applicable and current.<br />

To maintain the quality of our publications, we need your comments on the accuracy, clarity, organization, and<br />

value of this book.<br />

Address correspondence to:<br />

Manager, Information Products<br />

NCR Corporation<br />

2651 Satellite Blvd.<br />

Duluth, GA 30096<br />

Copyright © 2003<br />

By NCR Corporation<br />

Dayton, Ohio U.S.A.<br />

All Rights Reserved


i<br />

Safety Warnings<br />

Preface<br />

Audience<br />

This book is written for hardware installer/service personnel, system<br />

integrators, and field engineers.<br />

Notice: This <strong>doc</strong>ument is NCR proprietary information and is not to<br />

be disclosed or reproduced without consent.<br />

Servicing<br />

This product does not contain user serviceable parts. Servicing should<br />

only be performed by a qualified service technician.<br />

Fuse Replacement<br />

Caution: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only<br />

with the same type and ratings of fuse.<br />

Attention: Pour prévenir et vous protéger contre un risque de feu,<br />

remplacer la fusible avec une autre fusible de même type, seulement.<br />

Power Supply Cord Used as Disconnect Means<br />

Caution: The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect<br />

device. Ensure that the socket outlet is located/installed near the<br />

equipment and is easily accessible.<br />

Attention: Le cordon dʹalimentation est utilisé comme interrupteur<br />

général. La prise de courant doit être située ou installée å proximité du<br />

matériel et être facile dʹaccés.<br />

Lithium Battery Warning<br />

Caution: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.<br />

Replace only with the same or equivalent type as recommended by the<br />

manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturerʹs<br />

instructions.


ii<br />

Attention: Il y a danger dʹexplosion sʹil y a remplacement incorrect de<br />

la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou<br />

dʹun type recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rébut les<br />

batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.<br />

Battery Disposal (Switzerland)<br />

Refer to Annex 4.10 of SR814.013 for battery disposal.<br />

IT Power System<br />

This product is suitable for connection to an IT power system with a<br />

phase‐to‐phase voltage not exceeding 240 V.<br />

Peripheral Usage<br />

This terminal should only be used with peripheral devices that are<br />

certified by the appropriate safety agency for the country of installation<br />

(UL, CSA, TUV, VDE) or those which are recommended by NCR<br />

Corporation.<br />

DO NOT connect or disconnect a printer, keyboard, or any other<br />

terminal‐powered peripheral while the terminal is powered on. Doing<br />

so may result in peripheral or system damage.<br />

System Weight Considerations<br />

Warning: The NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐1xxx and <strong>7401</strong>‐2xxx terminals must be<br />

mounted securely to prevent a hazard. They must be installed in<br />

accordance with local building codes. The post or wall on which the<br />

unit is mounted should be able to withstand four times the weight of<br />

the unit, which is approximately 20 lbs. (9 kg). The NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx is<br />

a desk‐top unit that has an assembled weight of approximately 90<br />

lbs. (40.8 kg).<br />

Environmental Consciousness<br />

NCR is demonstrating its concern for the environment by designing an<br />

intelligent power management system into this terminal that operates<br />

efficiently whether the system is in a stand‐alone or network<br />

environment.


iii<br />

Grounding Instructions<br />

In the event of a malfunction or breakdown, grounding provides a<br />

path of least resistance for electric current to reduce the risk of electric<br />

shock. This product is equipped with an electric cord having an<br />

equipment‐grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must<br />

be plugged into a matching outlet that is properly installed and<br />

grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. Do not<br />

modify the plug provided – if it will not fit the outlet, have the proper<br />

outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Improper connection of the<br />

equipment‐grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock.<br />

The conductor with insulation having an outer surface that is green<br />

with or without yellow stripes is the equipment‐grounding conductor.<br />

If repair or replacement of the electric cord or plug is necessary, do not<br />

connect the equipment‐grounding conductor to a live terminal. Check<br />

with a qualified electrician or service personnel if the grounding<br />

instructions are not completely understood, or if in doubt as to whether<br />

the product is properly grounded.<br />

Use only 3‐wire extension cords that have 3‐prong grounding plugs<br />

and 3‐pole receptacles that accept the product’s plug. Repair or replace<br />

damaged or worn cords immediately.


iv<br />

References<br />

• NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> <strong>Har</strong>dware Service Guide (B005‐0000‐1341)<br />

• NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> Site Preparation Guide (B005‐0000‐1255)<br />

• NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> Interface Guide (B005‐0000‐01405)<br />

• NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> ATX 38 Printer User’s Manual<br />

(B005‐0000‐1454)<br />

• NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong>/7454 Retail Terminal Parts Identification Manual<br />

(B005‐0000‐1072)<br />

• NCR FitClient Software Userʹs Guide (B005‐0000‐1235)<br />

• NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> Migration Guide (B005‐0000‐1500)<br />

• NCR Retail Platform Software Terminal Utilities Guide<br />

(B005‐0000‐1503)


v<br />

Table of Contents<br />

Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>‐2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Introduction ...........................................................................................1‐1<br />

Serial Number/Model Number Label ................................................1‐2<br />

Fixed‐Angle Mount Label .............................................................1‐2<br />

Tilt‐Mount Label.............................................................................1‐3<br />

Model Numbers..............................................................................1‐4<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Modules...............................................................................1‐5<br />

Base Unit..........................................................................................1‐5<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Options..........................................................................1‐6<br />

Terminal Components not Supported ....................................1‐8<br />

System Configuration Diagram ..........................................................1‐9<br />

Kit Configuration Diagram ...............................................................1‐10<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Module Descriptions .......................................................1‐11<br />

Processor Board ............................................................................1‐11<br />

Processor/Chip Set ...................................................................1‐11<br />

Video Subsystem......................................................................1‐12<br />

Ethernet 10/100Base‐T LAN Communications ....................1‐13<br />

Wireless LAN Communications ............................................1‐15<br />

Universal Serial Bus.................................................................1‐16<br />

Serial Ports ................................................................................1‐16<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Monitor...................................................................1‐17<br />

PCI Expansion Header ............................................................1‐17<br />

IDE Header ...............................................................................1‐17<br />

Audio .........................................................................................1‐18<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader ...........................................................1‐18


vi<br />

Touch Screen Controller..........................................................1‐18<br />

Processor Board Connectors...................................................1‐19<br />

NCR Retail Specific <strong>Har</strong>dware...............................................1‐20<br />

Board BIOS................................................................................1‐25<br />

Operator Display ..........................................................................1‐29<br />

LCD Adapter Board.................................................................1‐29<br />

LCD Backlight Inverter Module.............................................1‐29<br />

Touch Screen.............................................................................1‐30<br />

Features ................................................................................................1‐31<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader ...............................................................1‐31<br />

Printer Options .............................................................................1‐32<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K590 Self‐Service Printer................................................1‐32<br />

7158 Printer ...............................................................................1‐33<br />

7167 Printer ...............................................................................1‐33<br />

7194 Printer ...............................................................................1‐34<br />

7197 Printer ...............................................................................1‐34<br />

Other Integrated Devices and Indicators ..................................1‐35<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d Disk Drive .......................................................................1‐35<br />

Reset Switch ..............................................................................1‐35<br />

Internal Speaker .......................................................................1‐36<br />

POS Connector Board..............................................................1‐36<br />

Motion Sensor...........................................................................1‐36<br />

Power/Status LED ....................................................................1‐37<br />

Power OK LED .........................................................................1‐37<br />

LAN Status LEDs .....................................................................1‐38<br />

Power Supply ...........................................................................1‐38<br />

Uninterruptible Power System (Optional) ...........................1‐39<br />

Integrated Scanner Module (Optional) .................................1‐39<br />

Integrated Speaker Module (Optional).................................1‐39


vii<br />

Compact Flash (Optional).......................................................1‐39<br />

USB RS‐232 Port Server ...........................................................1‐40<br />

Integrated CD‐ROM Drive (Tilt Mount Model) ..................1‐41<br />

Additional Connectors (Pentium III Board) .............................1‐42<br />

Compatibility.......................................................................................1‐43<br />

LAN Communications.................................................................1‐43<br />

Application Programmability.....................................................1‐43<br />

Operating System Information...................................................1‐43<br />

Migration..............................................................................................1‐44<br />

Retail Applications .......................................................................1‐44<br />

Retail Peripherals..........................................................................1‐44<br />

Retail Systems ...............................................................................1‐45<br />

Platform .....................................................................................1‐45<br />

Networks...................................................................................1‐45<br />

Platform Load...........................................................................1‐45<br />

Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx Product Overview<br />

Introduction ...........................................................................................2‐1<br />

Serial Number/Model Number Label ................................................2‐2<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx Model Numbers ...........................................................2‐2<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Modules...............................................................................2‐3<br />

Base Unit..........................................................................................2‐3<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Options..........................................................................2‐4<br />

Terminal Components not Supported ....................................2‐5<br />

System Configuration Diagram ..........................................................2‐6<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Module Descriptions .........................................................2‐7<br />

Processor Board ..............................................................................2‐7<br />

Processor/Chip Set .....................................................................2‐7<br />

Video Subsystem........................................................................2‐8


viii<br />

Ethernet 10/100Base‐T LAN Communications ......................2‐8<br />

Wireless LAN Communications ............................................2‐10<br />

Universal Serial Bus.................................................................2‐11<br />

Serial Ports ................................................................................2‐11<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Monitor...................................................................2‐12<br />

PCI Expansion Header ............................................................2‐12<br />

IDE Header ...............................................................................2‐12<br />

Audio .........................................................................................2‐13<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader ...........................................................2‐13<br />

Touch Screen Controller..........................................................2‐13<br />

Processor Board Connectors...................................................2‐14<br />

NCR Retail Specific <strong>Har</strong>dware...............................................2‐15<br />

Board BIOS................................................................................2‐18<br />

Operator Display ..........................................................................2‐22<br />

LCD Adapter Board.................................................................2‐22<br />

LCD Backlight Inverter Module.............................................2‐23<br />

Touch Screen.............................................................................2‐23<br />

Features ................................................................................................2‐24<br />

Secure Cabinet with Integrated Speakers .................................2‐24<br />

Ruggedized Keyboard with Trackball ......................................2‐25<br />

Pin Pad ...........................................................................................2‐25<br />

Motorized Card Reader ...............................................................2‐26<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader ...............................................................2‐26<br />

Full Page Printer ...........................................................................2‐27<br />

Other Integrated Devices and Indicators ..................................2‐28<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d Disk Drive .......................................................................2‐28<br />

Integrated CD‐ROM ................................................................2‐28<br />

Reset Switch ..............................................................................2‐28<br />

Compact Flash ..........................................................................2‐29


ix<br />

Internal Speaker .......................................................................2‐29<br />

POS Connector Board..............................................................2‐29<br />

USB Camera ..............................................................................2‐29<br />

Motion Sensor...........................................................................2‐30<br />

Power/Status LED ....................................................................2‐30<br />

Power OK LED .........................................................................2‐31<br />

LAN Status LEDs .....................................................................2‐31<br />

Power Supply ...........................................................................2‐31<br />

Motorized Card Reader Power Supply.................................2‐32<br />

Full Page Printer Power Supply.............................................2‐32<br />

Integrated Speakers .................................................................2‐32<br />

EasyPoint 45 Pedestal..............................................................2‐33<br />

Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>‐2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Introduction ...........................................................................................3‐1<br />

Installation Summary.....................................................................3‐1<br />

Installation Restrictions........................................................................3‐2<br />

Connecting the Cables..........................................................................3‐3<br />

Fixed‐Angle Mount (F504) ............................................................3‐3<br />

Fixed‐Angle Mount (F503) ............................................................3‐5<br />

Cable Routing .............................................................................3‐7<br />

Cable Connector Identification ................................................3‐9<br />

Tilt Mount......................................................................................3‐10<br />

Cable Routing ...........................................................................3‐11<br />

Cable Connector Identification ..............................................3‐12<br />

Installing Peripherals..........................................................................3‐13<br />

Installing a Transaction Printer ..................................................3‐13<br />

RS‐232 Installation....................................................................3‐13<br />

USB Installation........................................................................3‐14


x<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K590 Self‐Service Printer................................................3‐15<br />

Installing a Cash Drawer.............................................................3‐16<br />

Installing a Second Cash Drawer...........................................3‐17<br />

Installing PC Cards ......................................................................3‐18<br />

Mounting a Fixed‐Angle Mount Terminal......................................3‐21<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K522 Pedestal Mount..........................................................3‐22<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K521 Wall Mount ................................................................3‐24<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K521 Wall Mount with <strong>7401</strong>‐K530 Pole Brackets............3‐26<br />

Installing a K501 Tilt Mount Terminal.............................................3‐33<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K533 Wall Mount ................................................................3‐34<br />

Wall Mounting a <strong>7401</strong>‐K502 Core Module......................................3‐35<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐9212 LCD No‐Cabinet (12.1‐inch)............................................3‐37<br />

Installation Guidelines.................................................................3‐38<br />

Mounting Specification Illustrations .........................................3‐39<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐9512 LCD No‐Cabinet (15‐inch)...............................................3‐40<br />

Installation Guidelines.................................................................3‐40<br />

Mounting Specification Illustrations .........................................3‐41<br />

4055 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) .....................................3‐43<br />

Installing the UPS .........................................................................3‐44<br />

Installing the Power Mon II® Software ....................................3‐44<br />

Configuring the Power Mon II® Software ...............................3‐45<br />

Finalizing the Installation ..................................................................3‐46<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win2000)...........................3‐46<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinXPe)............................3‐46<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinNT).............................3‐47<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win98) ‐ (Discontinued) .3‐48<br />

Setting Auto‐Logon (WinNT Terminal) ..........................................3‐49<br />

Installing a Serial Mouse....................................................................3‐54<br />

Calibrating the Touch Screen ............................................................3‐55


xi<br />

Calibration Using MicroTouch (Windows) ..............................3‐56<br />

Calibration Using Microcal (DOS) .............................................3‐58<br />

Calibration From the BIOS..........................................................3‐59<br />

Summary ...................................................................................3‐60<br />

Out‐of‐Box Failures ......................................................................3‐60<br />

Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Introduction ...........................................................................................4‐1<br />

Installation Summary.....................................................................4‐1<br />

U.K. Keyboard Configuration ......................................................4‐1<br />

Windows 2000 ............................................................................4‐1<br />

Windows XPe .............................................................................4‐2<br />

Windows NT...............................................................................4‐3<br />

Installation Restrictions........................................................................4‐4<br />

Connecting the Cables..........................................................................4‐5<br />

Cable Routing .............................................................................4‐5<br />

Cable Connector Identification ................................................4‐5<br />

Installing Peripherals............................................................................4‐6<br />

Installing the Angled Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR) ...............4‐7<br />

Installing Country Keyboards ......................................................4‐8<br />

Using the Full Page Printer................................................................4‐13<br />

Loading the Paper ........................................................................4‐13<br />

Removing Paper from the Printer Feed Rolls...........................4‐14<br />

Removing Power from the Printer.............................................4‐14<br />

Using the Printer Test and Display Panel.................................4‐15<br />

Display LED Indicators ...........................................................4‐15<br />

Panel Switches ..........................................................................4‐16<br />

Full Page Printer Diagnostics and Setup...................................4‐17<br />

Installing a <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx on a Table Top Mount .................................4‐18


xii<br />

Mounting Procedures ..................................................................4‐18<br />

Accessing the Mounting Screws ............................................4‐20<br />

Installing a <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx on the EasyPoint 45 Pedestal......................4‐21<br />

4055 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) .....................................4‐22<br />

Installing the UPS .........................................................................4‐22<br />

Installing the Power Mon II® Software ....................................4‐23<br />

Configuring the Power Mon II® Software ...............................4‐23<br />

Finalizing the Installation ..................................................................4‐24<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win2000)...........................4‐24<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinXPe)............................4‐24<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinNT).............................4‐25<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win98) ‐ (Discontinued) .4‐26<br />

Calibrating the Touch Screen ............................................................4‐27<br />

Calibration Using MicroTouch (Windows) ..............................4‐27<br />

Calibration Using Microcal (DOS) .............................................4‐29<br />

Calibration from the BIOS...........................................................4‐30<br />

Summary ...................................................................................4‐31<br />

Out‐of‐Box Failures ......................................................................4‐31<br />

Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Introduction ...........................................................................................5‐1<br />

Entering Setup without a Keyboard ............................................5‐1<br />

Entering Setup Using a Keyboard................................................5‐2<br />

How to Select Menu Options........................................................5‐3<br />

Setting the Date and Time.............................................................5‐3<br />

Setting Passwords...........................................................................5‐4<br />

Configuring a <strong>Har</strong>d Drive.............................................................5‐5<br />

Setting Memory Cache...................................................................5‐5<br />

Setting Memory Shadow ...............................................................5‐6


xiii<br />

Setting Boot Options ......................................................................5‐6<br />

Allocating Interrupts......................................................................5‐7<br />

Restoring Factory Settings.............................................................5‐7<br />

BIOS Default CMOS Values (<strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/35xx/45xx BIOS<br />

Version 2.2.1.x)................................................................................5‐8<br />

Main Values ................................................................................5‐8<br />

Advanced Values .......................................................................5‐9<br />

Security Values .........................................................................5‐14<br />

Power Values ............................................................................5‐14<br />

Boot Values ...............................................................................5‐14<br />

Exit Values ................................................................................5‐15<br />

Interrupts (<strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/35xx/45xx BIOS Version 2.2.1.x) ..........5‐16<br />

Memory Map (<strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/35xx/45xx BIOS Version 2.2.1.x)....5‐17<br />

BIOS Default CMOS Values (<strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx BIOS Version<br />

2.3.x.x) ............................................................................................5‐18<br />

Main Values ..............................................................................5‐18<br />

Advanced Values .....................................................................5‐19<br />

Security Values .........................................................................5‐24<br />

Power Values ............................................................................5‐24<br />

Boot Values ...............................................................................5‐25<br />

Exit Values ................................................................................5‐25<br />

Interrupts (<strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx BIOS Version 2.3.x.x)....................5‐26<br />

Memory Map (<strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx BIOS Version 2.3.x.x) .............5‐27<br />

BIOS Default CMOS Values (<strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx BIOS Version<br />

1.5.0.4 ‐ Discontinued) .................................................................5‐28<br />

Main Values ..............................................................................5‐28<br />

Advanced Values .....................................................................5‐30<br />

I/O Device Configuration........................................................5‐30<br />

PCI Configuration....................................................................5‐30


xiv<br />

Interrupts (<strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx BIOS Version 1.5.0.4 ‐<br />

Discontinued)................................................................................5‐31<br />

Memory Map (<strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx BIOS Version 1.5.0.4 ‐<br />

Discontinued)................................................................................5‐32<br />

Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

Introduction ...........................................................................................6‐1<br />

Prerequisites....................................................................................6‐1<br />

Updating Procedures .....................................................................6‐3<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win2000).............................6‐5<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinXPe)..............................6‐5<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinNT)...............................6‐6<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win98) –<br />

(Discontinued) ............................................................................6‐6<br />

Gold Disk Contents...............................................................................6‐8<br />

Microsoft Operating System License Agreements.....................6‐8<br />

Operating System Restrictions .....................................................6‐9<br />

Standby and Hibernate Mode Restriction ..............................6‐9<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx Win2000 Operating<br />

System Recovery Software (Version 02.03.00.01)........................6‐9<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx Win2000 Operating System Recovery<br />

Software (Version 02.05.00.02) ....................................................6‐11<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐45xx Win2000 Operating System Recovery<br />

Software (Version 02.04.00.02) ....................................................6‐14<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx WinXPe Operating System<br />

Recovery Software (Version 02.05.00.01)....................................6‐16<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx WinXPe Operating System Recovery<br />

Software (Version 02.05.00.01) .....................................................6‐18<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐/22xx/25xx/26xx/32xx/35xx NT Operating<br />

System Recovery Software (Version 02.05.00.02)......................6‐20


xv<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx NT Operating System Recovery<br />

Software (Version 01.04.01.00) .....................................................6‐22<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx NT Operating System Recovery Software<br />

(Version 02.05.00.02)......................................................................6‐24<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx Win98 Operating System<br />

Recovery Software (Version 02.03.00.01)....................................6‐26<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx Win98 Operating System Recovery<br />

Software (Version 01.01.00.00) .....................................................6‐28<br />

OS Recovery from a Larger Disk Image ..........................................6‐29<br />

Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures<br />

Introduction ...........................................................................................7‐1<br />

Prerequisites....................................................................................7‐1<br />

Updating Procedures .....................................................................7‐2<br />

BIOS Crisis Recovery............................................................................7‐5<br />

Recovery Procedures......................................................................7‐6<br />

Cable/Connector Pin‐Out Information ..............................................7‐8<br />

Chapter 8: NCR <strong>7401</strong> 7890/7892 Scanner Differences<br />

Introduction ...........................................................................................8‐1<br />

Starting the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner Motor and Laser ................................8‐2<br />

Programming the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner Using Programming Tags .....8‐4<br />

Programming the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner Through the RS‐232<br />

Interface ...........................................................................................8‐5<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Scanner Default Settings.......................................................8‐6<br />

Appendix A: Cables<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Cables .....................................................................................A‐1


xvi<br />

Appendix B: Feature Kits<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Kits.......................................................................................... B‐1


xvii<br />

Revision Record<br />

Issue Date Remarks<br />

A Aug 00 First issue (separated <strong>7401</strong> and 7454 sections out of<br />

B005‐0000‐1069)<br />

B Feb 01 Updated to Release 2.2<br />

Removed hardware service information from this<br />

<strong>doc</strong>ument which was previously called the <strong>7401</strong> Web<br />

<strong>Kiosk</strong> <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation and Service Guide (B005‐<br />

0000‐1254) and renamed it the <strong>7401</strong> Web <strong>Kiosk</strong><br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Userʹs Guide (B005‐0000‐1254). The<br />

hardware service information was placed in a new<br />

<strong>doc</strong>ument, the <strong>7401</strong> Web <strong>Kiosk</strong> <strong>Har</strong>dware Service<br />

Guide (B005‐0000‐1341).<br />

C June 01 Updated to Release 2.3<br />

D Sept 01 Updated BIOS screens. Added PC Card installation.<br />

E Dec 01 Additional updates for Release 2.3<br />

F May 02 Updated to Release 2.4.<br />

Changed Web <strong>Kiosk</strong> to EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong>.<br />

Added EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong>‐45xx terminal<br />

F Aug 02 Add EasyPoint 45 Pedestal<br />

G Sep 02 Add Country Keyboards to <strong>7401</strong>‐45xx<br />

H Dec 02 Updated to Release 2.5<br />

Added <strong>7401</strong>‐26xx and <strong>7401</strong>‐46xx models<br />

Changed <strong>7401</strong>‐45xx references to <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx


xviii<br />

Radio Frequency Interference Statements<br />

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)<br />

Information to User<br />

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A<br />

digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide<br />

reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in<br />

a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio<br />

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction<br />

manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this<br />

equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user<br />

will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.<br />

NCR is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized<br />

modification of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables<br />

and equipment other than those specified by NCR. The correction of interference<br />

caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the<br />

responsibility of the user. The user is cautioned that changes or modifications not<br />

expressly approved by NCR may void the userʹs authority to operate the equipment.<br />

Canadian Department of Communications<br />

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES‐003.<br />

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions<br />

from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian<br />

Department of Communications.<br />

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB‐003 du Canada.<br />

Le présent appareil numérique nʹémet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les<br />

limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A prescrites dans le<br />

règlement sur le brouillage radioélectriques édicté par le ministrère des<br />

Communications du Canada.<br />

Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI)


xix<br />

IEC & EN Laser Product Label<br />

CAUTION: Laser<br />

radiation when<br />

open and interlock<br />

defeated.<br />

DO NOT STARE<br />

INTO BEAM.<br />

This laser module<br />

does not comply<br />

with 21CFR1040.<br />

USE ONLY AS A<br />

Component.<br />

(Label is attached to laser<br />

module inside the cabinet.)<br />

Class IIa Laser Product.<br />

Avoid Long-term Viewing<br />

of Direct Laser Light.<br />

Appareil à Laser de classe IIa<br />

Eviter Toute Exposition Prolongèe<br />

de la vue à la lumiè re laser directe.<br />

Class IIa Producto Laser. Tratè<br />

De no ver directamente èl Rayo<br />

Laser por mucho tiempò.<br />

Laser Power<br />

IEC & EN 60825-1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

The NCR <strong>7401</strong> Scanner is not intended for long‐term viewing of direct<br />

laser light. However, the unit is safe if used as intended. This scanner<br />

meets the following laser/LED power requirements.<br />

• Class IIa CDRH (Center for Devices and Radiological Health)<br />

• Class IIa Laser—Avoid long‐term viewing of direct laser light<br />

• Class 1 EN60‐825 (Europäische Norm)<br />

Following is the radiant energy of the laser/LED light as applied to<br />

each of the specified requirements.<br />

Accessible Emission Limit (CDRH Calculation)<br />

17325<br />

0.99 Milliwatts<br />

Accessible Emission Limit EN60 825‐1:1994+AII:1996 0.81 Milliwatts<br />

Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures<br />

other than specified herein may result in hazardous radiation<br />

exposure.


xx<br />

Declaration of Conformity<br />

Manufacturer's Name<br />

Manufacturer's Address<br />

Type of Equipment<br />

Model Number<br />

Electrical Ratings (Input)<br />

NCR Corporation<br />

NCR Corporation<br />

Retail Solutions Division – Atlanta<br />

2651 Satellite Boulevard<br />

Duluth, GA 30096‐5810<br />

Information Technology Equipment<br />

Class <strong>7401</strong>‐2xxx and <strong>7401</strong>‐3xxx<br />

100‐120 V/200‐240 V, 2.0 A/1.0 A, 50‐60 Hz<br />

NCR Corporation, 1700 South Patterson Boulevard, Dayton, OH 45459,<br />

USA, declares that the equipment specified above conforms to the<br />

referenced EU Directives and <strong>Har</strong>monized Standards.<br />

EU Directive<br />

<strong>Har</strong>monized Standard(s)<br />

89/336/EEC (EMC) EN 55022<br />

EN 55024<br />

EN61003‐2<br />

EN61003‐3<br />

73/23/EEC (Low Voltage)<br />

EN 60 950: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + All<br />

NCR Corporation<br />

Retail Solutions Division — Atlanta<br />

2651 Satellite Boulevard<br />

Duluth, GA 30096‐5810<br />

European Contact:<br />

International IP Counsel<br />

206 Marylebone Road<br />

London, NW1 6LY, England


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

NCR<br />

Introduction<br />

Tilt Mount<br />

Fixed-Angle Mount<br />

18289<br />

The NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> is an interactive touch screen terminal with<br />

retail functionality that supports a variety of kiosk and self‐service<br />

applications. The <strong>7401</strong> is housed in an integrated, compact cabinet and<br />

can be tilt mounted, fixed‐angle mounted or flush mounted.<br />

The major hardware features of the <strong>7401</strong> are a 12.1‐inch or 15‐inch flat<br />

panel display with touch screen input and LAN connectivity, plus<br />

optional magnetic stripe reader, infrared reader, scanner, stereo audio,<br />

self service printer and wireless LAN. It also supports custom kiosk<br />

environments.<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> is Internet/Intranet ready. System loading occurs from a<br />

network server, and software and data content are delivered from a<br />

server through standard Internet protocols.


1-2 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Serial Number/Model Number Label<br />

Fixed-Angle Mount Label<br />

The unitʹs serial number, model number, tracer number, and date of<br />

manufacture are included on a label on the back of the Core Module.<br />

Refer to following sections for additional information.<br />

The serial number is repeated on the non‐MSR side of the Core<br />

Module.<br />

To view the label:<br />

• For non‐hinged mounts, remove the Core Module from the mount.<br />

• For hinged mounts, the Core Module does not have to be removed.<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-3000-8000<br />

50-12345678<br />

Class/Model<br />

Serial Number<br />

Mfg<br />

Date: 11/15/01<br />

F000,F005,F024,F031,F050,F101,F200,F422,F503<br />

Date Manufactured<br />

Feature Number(s)<br />

19476


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-3<br />

Tilt-Mount Label<br />

To view the label, tilt the Core Module and remove the cable cover.<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-2000-8000<br />

50-12345678<br />

Class/Model<br />

Serial Number<br />

Mfg<br />

Date: 11/15/01<br />

F000,F005,F024,F031,F050,F101,F200,F422,F503<br />

Date Manufactured<br />

Feature Number(s)<br />

19477


1-4 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Model Numbers<br />

The following table identifies <strong>7401</strong> terminal models.<br />

Model<br />

Description<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐2212 Standard Model ‐ 12.1‐inch Capacitive Touch LCD,<br />

Ethernet Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐3212 Scanner Model ‐ 12.1‐inch Capacitive Touch LCD,<br />

Integrated Fixed Angle Mount, and Ethernet Cable (Uses 1<br />

RS‐232 Port for Scanner)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐2622 Bundled Model ‐ 12.1‐inch Capacitive Touch LCD,<br />

Celeron 700 MHz, 128 MB SDRAM, 10 GB <strong>Har</strong>d Drive,<br />

Adapter Board (F031), and Ethernet Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐2512 Standard Model ‐ 15‐inch Capacitive Touch LCD, Ethernet<br />

Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐2518 Standard Model ‐ 15‐inch Resistive Touch LCD, Ethernet<br />

Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐2625 Bundled Model ‐ 15‐inch Capacitive Touch LCD, Celeron<br />

700 MHz, 128 MB SDRAM, 10 GB <strong>Har</strong>d Drive, Adapter<br />

Board (F031), and Ethernet Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐2630 Bundled Model ‐ 15‐inch Capacitive Touch LCD, PIII 700<br />

MHz, 128 MB SDRAM, 20 GB <strong>Har</strong>d Drive, Adapter Board<br />

(F031), and Ethernet Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐2635 Bundled Model ‐ 15‐inch Capacitive Touch LCD, PIII 1<br />

GHz, 128 MB SDRAM, 20 GB <strong>Har</strong>d Drive, Adapter Board<br />

(F031), and Ethernet Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐2655 Bundled Model ‐ 15‐inch Capacitive Touch LCD, Celeron<br />

700 MHz, 128 MB SDRAM, 256 MB Flash Disk, Adapter<br />

Board (F031), and Ethernet Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐9512 No Bezel/Cabinet Model ‐ 15‐inch Capacitive LCD,<br />

Ethernet Cable


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-5<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Modules<br />

Base Unit<br />

• Processor Board<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

Pentium III/Celeron processor<br />

SVGA chipset (12‐inch monitor)<br />

XGA chipset (15‐inch monitor)<br />

MPEGII chipset<br />

1 MB Flash BIOS (not CMOS)<br />

Four RS‐232 ports (two optionally powered)<br />

10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN chipset, Wake‐on‐LAN support, and<br />

RJ‐45 port<br />

PC Audio with an internal mono speaker<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

SoundBlaster ® 16 compatible audio chipset<br />

Two USB type A ports<br />

PS/2 keyboard port<br />

External VGA display port<br />

Dual display support<br />

External stereo speaker port<br />

Internal PS/2 mouse (dedicated to the touch screen)<br />

One SODIMM (Small Outline DIMM) RAM socket<br />

64 MB memory on board<br />

IDE support for a hard disk, a CD ROM, and an optional<br />

Compact Flash disk in place of the hard disk


1-6 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Options<br />

• POS Connector Board<br />

− Cash drawer port (supports two drawers via a Y‐cable)<br />

− Internal parallel port (dedicated to the optional customer<br />

display)<br />

−<br />

Microphone<br />

• 12.1‐inch Operator Display – active capacitive touch LCD<br />

• 15‐inch Operator Display – active LCD with capacitive or resistive<br />

touch<br />

• 2.5‐inch low or high capacity hard disk<br />

• Integrated Motion Sensor, capable of waking up the terminal from<br />

a low power state<br />

• Integrated Power Supply<br />

• Reset switch which can be used to recover from a lock‐up condition<br />

• 3‐meter Ethernet cable<br />

• U.S. power cord<br />

• Intel Pentium III Processor<br />

• Integrated 3‐track ISO MSR<br />

• Integrated Scanner Module<br />

• Integrated Stereo Module<br />

• Integrated CD‐ROM<br />

• Integrated Infrared Sensor<br />

• PCMCIA (for wireless LAN)<br />

• Mounting options: Table‐top, Pedestal, Pole, Wall, Tilt/Swivel<br />

• 256 MB Compact Flash


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-7<br />

• 64/128/256 MB memory<br />

• Cash drawers<br />

− 2113 Cash Drawer (modular)<br />

− 2189 Cash Drawer (modular)<br />

− 2260 Cash Drawer (modular)<br />

− Dual cash drawer cable<br />

• Printers:<br />

− 7158 Thermal Receipt/Impact Printer<br />

− 7167 Thermal Receipt/Impact Printer<br />

− 7194 Thermal Receipt Printer<br />

− 7197 Thermal Receipt Printer<br />

− Remote printer cables<br />

− Signal extenders for remote printers<br />

• <strong>7401</strong>‐K590 Self‐Service Printer<br />

• <strong>7401</strong>‐K580 Self‐Service Printer (Discontinued)<br />

• PC keyboard<br />

− Keyboard Shelf<br />

• USB RS‐232 Port Server<br />

− USB Serial Converter<br />

• 4055 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)


1-8 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Terminal Components not Supported<br />

It is important to note that the terminal does not support the following<br />

components.<br />

Not Supported<br />

CMOS for hard totals, logs, and<br />

tallies<br />

Removable media, e.g., a flex<br />

disk<br />

SLP terminal loading<br />

Keylock for security (X, L, R, S)<br />

ISA and PCI Expansion slots<br />

DVD ROM<br />

Internal UPS<br />

Manual Video and audio<br />

controls<br />

DOS, Windows 3.1, Windows<br />

NT 3.51, Windows 9x, OS/2<br />

133 MHz/266 MHz Pentium<br />

Processor<br />

Alternative Implementation<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d disk, flash disk, or server<br />

storage<br />

LAN communication to an NT server<br />

via standard protocols<br />

Local storage, TCP/IP networking and<br />

PXE loading<br />

Reset switch based security<br />

USB and LAN based devices (future)<br />

External UPS<br />

Software controlled<br />

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,<br />

Windows XPe<br />

Intel Pentium III 500/700 MHz and 1<br />

GHz , and Celeron 450/550/600/700<br />

MHz processors


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-9<br />

System Configuration Diagram<br />

7892<br />

7837<br />

2010 Coin<br />

Dispenser<br />

<strong>7401</strong><br />

Keyboard<br />

2336-K008<br />

7194<br />

7158<br />

RS232 (4)<br />

2 Optionally<br />

Powered<br />

PS/2 KBD<br />

VGA<br />

Note: 7194 and 7158 are<br />

available in both RS-232<br />

and USB.<br />

USB<br />

POS Connector Bd.<br />

Processor Board<br />

Ethernet<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-K580/K590<br />

Parallel<br />

Cash Dwr<br />

Audio<br />

SVideo<br />

2336-K007<br />

2260/2189<br />

2nd Cash Drawer<br />

(Y-Cable)<br />

2113<br />

18319b


1-10 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Kit Configuration Diagram<br />

2336-K037<br />

<strong>7401</strong> w/K590<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-3xxx<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-2xxx<br />

2336-K052<br />

F501<br />

K542<br />

F502<br />

K533<br />

F/K059<br />

F511<br />

F512<br />

F521<br />

F101<br />

F504<br />

F505<br />

F201<br />

F200<br />

K540<br />

K536<br />

K543<br />

K530<br />

K535<br />

K523<br />

F/K590<br />

K525<br />

K534<br />

18318d-P


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-11<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Module Descriptions<br />

Processor Board<br />

Processor/Chip Set<br />

The terminal uses an Intel architecture processor, which permits it to<br />

leverage existing software drivers and applications, as well as provide<br />

the greatest flexibility in choosing an operating system. This provides<br />

several other advantages:<br />

• Capable of SW MPEG‐1 or MPEG‐2 playback at 30 frames per<br />

second with 22 kHz stereo audio (may be limited by OS<br />

constraints).<br />

• SoundBlaster ® ‐compatible audio<br />

• Expansion capabilities for optional features and future<br />

requirements (ISA/PCI bus and USB)<br />

The following sections identify processors, system bus speed, and onboard<br />

memory available on <strong>7401</strong> processor boards:<br />

Release 1.0<br />

• Intel Mobile Pentium 166 MHz or 266 MHz Processor (PGA<br />

package) used with the Intel 430TX PC chipset. The 430TX chipset<br />

consists of the 82439TX System Controller (North Bridge chip), also<br />

called the MTXC, and the 82371AB (South Bridge chip), also called<br />

the PIIX4.<br />

• A 66 MHz system bus<br />

These Intel Mobile Pentium Processors have been discontinued.


1-12 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Release 2.0 – 2.4<br />

• Intel Pentium III 500 MHz or 700 MHz Processor, or Intel Celeron<br />

450 MHz, 550 MHz, or 600 MHz Processor (µPGA package) used<br />

with the Intel 440BX PC chipset. The 440BX chipset consists of the<br />

82440BX System Controller (North Bridge chip), also called the<br />

MTXC, and the 82371AB (South Bridge chip), also called the PIIX4.<br />

• A 100 MHz system bus<br />

• 64 MB memory with ability to add SODIMMS to i<strong>ncr</strong>ease the<br />

memory capacity of the terminal<br />

Release 2.5<br />

• Intel 700 MHz Celeron Processor or Intel 1 GHz Pentium III<br />

Processor (BGA package) on board, removing the µPGA processor<br />

socket. Intel 440BX chipset same as in Release 2.0 – 2.5.<br />

• 100 MHz system bus and memory support, 64‐bit bus width, and<br />

AGP video interface.<br />

• 128 MB memory with ability to add SODIMMS to i<strong>ncr</strong>ease the<br />

memory capacity of the terminal<br />

Video Subsystem<br />

The video subsystem supports the following LCD types:<br />

• 12.1‐inch active matrix (TFT [thin film transistor]) 800x600 with 64<br />

k colors<br />

• 15‐inch active matrix (TFT) 1024x760 with 64 k colors<br />

Support for the LCD integrated display is provided internally. External<br />

support for SVGA monitors (800x600 [or better] resolution and 64 k [or<br />

better] colors) is provided by a CRT 15‐Pin D‐shell connector.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-13<br />

The LCD back lighting is also software controlled. In addition to OFF<br />

and ON modes, a dimmed mode is supported in the hardware to allow<br />

i<strong>ncr</strong>eased tube life. If appropriate software drivers are loaded, full<br />

brightness is restored when touched, motion detection (Motion Sensor<br />

section), or an application request (i.e., to play promotional material on<br />

a preset schedule).<br />

Ethernet 10/100Base-T LAN Communications<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> terminal has an Intel 82559 LAN Controller that supports<br />

10/100Base‐T Ethernet. Ethernet 100Base‐T is also known as ʺFast<br />

Ethernet.ʺ The Boot ROM for diskless boot functionality is included in<br />

the 1 MB system ROM. The hardware is compatible with the TCP/IP,<br />

DHCP, and TFTP protocols required for remote boot of the platform.<br />

Appropriate software must be used to enable each protocol used over<br />

the Ethernet link.<br />

The terminal may be connected to either a 10 MB/s or 100 MB/s<br />

Ethernet connection. The hardware automatically selects the correct<br />

speed (if enabled by software to do so).<br />

The LAN hardware supports wakeup packet capability as defined in<br />

the Device Class Power Management Specification, Network Device<br />

Class (available from Microsoftʹs web site).<br />

When the platform is in the Soft OFF state (refer to the Advanced Power<br />

Management section that follows), receipt of a Wakeup Packet on the<br />

LAN can return the system to the ON state, if this feature is enabled by<br />

software.<br />

Due to limitations of the LAN controller and the OS, all features<br />

described in the Network Device Class specification may not be<br />

available.


1-14 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

100Base‐T is wired identically to 10Base‐T, except that the twisted pair<br />

cable must be Category 5 and the hubs must permit 100 or 10/100 MB/s<br />

operation. Although 10Base‐T will operate on Category 3 twisted pair,<br />

or NCR ʺ747ʺ cable, an upgrade to Category 5 is required for<br />

100Base‐T.<br />

A customer desiring to use the terminal in an existing 10Base‐T<br />

environment can do so and simply run at 10 MB. In order to upgrade to<br />

100MB/s, Category 5 cable and 100 or 10/100 hubs must be installed.<br />

NCR strongly recommends the use of Category 5 for all new cabling,<br />

even if the customer initially intends to run only 10Base‐T.<br />

LED Indicators for Link Integrity (verifies cable and hub connection are<br />

good) and LAN speed is provided on the Processor Board near the row<br />

of connectors at the bottom of the e‐box. The LED is ON (yellow) when<br />

the speed is running at 100 MB/s.<br />

Link Integrity is provided to the PC chipset to permit boot‐up software<br />

to verify the presence of the LAN connection. Software must allow 2<br />

seconds after power‐up in order for the Link Integrity signal to become<br />

valid.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-15<br />

Wireless LAN Communications<br />

When a wired Ethernet connection is not desired, a wireless LAN<br />

adapter may be installed in the PCMCIA socket. This requires that the<br />

PCMCIA daughter‐card feature be installed. A wireless LAN used in<br />

the terminal must meet the following requirements:<br />

• Integrated antenna that meets the requirements of PCMCIA (PC<br />

Card) Extended Type 2 card definition (a maximum of 5‐cm<br />

additional length).<br />

• Power consumption within the capabilities of the PCMCIA<br />

daughter‐card.<br />

• Signaling requirements within the capabilities of the terminal<br />

PCMCIA interface. The main restriction is that DMA transactions<br />

are not supported over the PCMCIA interface.<br />

• Device drivers for the targeted operating system must exist.<br />

• Appropriate infrastructure (server support, Base Stations, Ceiling<br />

Antennas, etc) must be present in the installation site, and the<br />

maximum RF range of the wireless system must not be exceeded.<br />

Interoperability ‐ While the 802.11 standard provides an interoperable<br />

protocol definition, there are vendor‐specific extensions to the protocol<br />

that encourage users to stay with one supplierʹs equipment. This also<br />

applies to wireless infrastructure and access points, 802.11 does not<br />

govern this operation. Mixing of RF suppliers on a site is not<br />

recommended until the RF suppliers have demonstrated<br />

interoperability.<br />

The wireless networks operate at speeds of 1‐2 MB/s with 2 percent<br />

packet loss typical. The application developer must be aware of the<br />

performance limitations and design applications that are acceptable to<br />

the customer when run over the slower network.<br />

Remote Wakeup over the wireless network is not possible because the<br />

cards do not support it. An alternative is to use the system real‐time<br />

clock wake up at a scheduled time.


1-16 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

The wired Ethernet connection is not certified for use in configurations<br />

where a wireless adapter is installed.<br />

Universal Serial Bus<br />

Two USB Type‐A ports are provided on the terminal. USB Host<br />

Controller support is provided in hardware on the Processor Board.<br />

Note: Third party USB peripherals require support from the operating<br />

system, which is currently limited to Windows 2000 and Windows<br />

Xpe. The terminal must use the I/O Networks drivers to support the<br />

NCR USB printer and scanner products. These drives are available<br />

under Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XPe.<br />

Serial Ports<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> Release 2.x processor boards provide two RS‐232 ports (9‐pin<br />

D‐shell connectors, Ports 1 and 2) directly on the board and support<br />

two additional RS‐232 ports. Ports 3 and 4 require an optional harness<br />

connection to the processor board. Ports 1 and 3 can be supplied with<br />

+12 V DC on Pin 9 when properly set up in the BIOS. The total power<br />

drawn by Ports 1 and/or 3 must be no greater than 1 amp at 12 V+ DC.<br />

Refer to the following table for RS‐232 pin‐out information.<br />

The BIOS permits flexibility in mapping resources. However, a fullyloaded<br />

system (2 PCMCIA cards that require IRQs, four serial ports in<br />

use, USB in use, parallel port in use, and MSR) may not have enough<br />

available IRQs to support all serial ports. Use a USB serial port<br />

expander to overcome this PC architecture limitation.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-17<br />

Port 2 shares hardware resources with the IRDA connection; if IRDA is<br />

in use, Port 3 is not available.<br />

RS-232 DB-9 Male Connector Pinout<br />

Pin Port A Port B<br />

1 DCD DCD<br />

2 RXD RXD<br />

3 TXD TXD<br />

4 DTR DTR<br />

5 GND GND<br />

6 DSR DSR<br />

7 RTS RTS<br />

8 CTS CTS<br />

9 RI or +12* RI<br />

* If Port 1 or 3 are powered, pin 9 will be +12 V.<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Monitor<br />

The hardware monitor generates an interrupt to the system whenever<br />

any of the internal voltages used by the system processor goes above or<br />

below the acceptable operating range. An interrupt is also generated<br />

when the temperature of the Processor exceeds safe levels. Software<br />

can use this indication to slow or stop the system and/or force a reset.<br />

PCI Expansion Header<br />

A single expansion header is provided to support optional features,<br />

such as the PCMCIA for Wireless LAN Board. This board supports two<br />

Type 2 or one Type 3 PCMCIA type cards.<br />

IDE Header<br />

A standard IDE header is provided to support the 2.5‐inch hard disk<br />

drive and integrated CD‐ROM. This header al supports the optional<br />

256 MB IDE compact flash available in place of the hard disk.


1-18 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Audio<br />

The base unit has SoundBlaster‐compatible audio. Wave table<br />

synthesis is not supported. FM synthesis and MIDI are supported in<br />

the hardware, but requires software driver support to function.<br />

Higher quality integrated stereo speakers may be added as an option to<br />

the terminal. The amplifier is located on the Processor Board; the<br />

speaker output is provided on a header that receives the harness from<br />

the speaker module. In addition, a Line Out is provided on a 3.5 mm<br />

stereo jack that permits connection of external amplified speakers.<br />

The integrated stereo speakers, or an amplifier connected to Line Out,<br />

must be used in order to play SoundBlaster (audio subsystem) audio.<br />

However, an internal EUI speaker provides PC speaker functionality<br />

(beeps and tones) for all configurations.<br />

The volume control can be set during system configuration.<br />

The PC speaker sounds (such as beeps and touch clicks) are directed<br />

into the audio subsystem and are audible if speakers are connected.<br />

• Release 2.0 – 2.4 processor boards use a Cirrus/Crystal CS4614 (PCIbased)<br />

sound controller that supports DirectX 6 sound.<br />

• Release 2.5 processor boards use an ESS Allegro ES1989 sound<br />

controller that supports DirectX 8 sound.<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader<br />

A 3‐track MSR head is available as an option. The ISO card format is<br />

supported.<br />

When card data is read, an interrupt is generated. A software device<br />

driver for the MSR must be loaded to enable the application to process<br />

the data.<br />

Touch Screen Controller<br />

The MicroTouch ʺExcaliburʺ chip is used to interface the touch panel.<br />

This controller supports MicroTouch capacitive panels.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-19<br />

In order to save an RS‐232 port, the touch data is delivered to the<br />

system through the mouse interface. This requires a mouse‐aware<br />

touch device driver for the appropriate OS.<br />

When the system is operating in the dimmed display mode, touch<br />

activity can restore full brightness if instructed by software to do so.<br />

When system is in low power mode, touch activity can generate the<br />

mouse port interrupt (IRQ12).<br />

Processor Board Connectors<br />

All connectors are either keyed or impossible to plug incorrectly due to<br />

mechanical design of the product.<br />

External Connectors<br />

VGA CRT RGB 15 pin D Shell<br />

Ethernet RJ45<br />

Dual USB Type A<br />

External Stereo speaker (3.5mm<br />

jack)<br />

Power supply<br />

RS‐232 9 pin D shell (two, one<br />

with +12 V power option)<br />

PS/2 Keyboard<br />

Customer Display<br />

Cash Drawer<br />

IRDA<br />

20‐pin high density RS‐232<br />

Conversion connector<br />

Microphone<br />

S‐Video<br />

Internal Connectors<br />

LCD<br />

Back light Inverter<br />

Integrated Speaker Module<br />

MSR<br />

Touch screen (PS/2)<br />

Integrated Scanner (<strong>7401</strong>)<br />

Motion Sensor / Power Indicator<br />

PCI Expansion header<br />

IDE<br />

Parallel port (POS Board header)<br />

Cash Drawer port (POS Board<br />

header)


1-20 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Flash Disk Interface (Discontinued)<br />

The Release 2.0 – 2.5 processor boards provide support for a flash disk<br />

array in the form of an M‐Systems DiskOnChip. A 32‐pin socket is<br />

provided for this feature. The flash disk must be installed and enabled<br />

in BIOS Setup. This feature is not available on Release 2.5 processor<br />

boards.<br />

NCR Retail Specific <strong>Har</strong>dware<br />

The Processor Board contains logic that provides support for the<br />

custom retail interface. The logic controls the following features:<br />

• Dual Cash Drawer Support<br />

• Cash Drawer Diagnostic Support<br />

• Magnetic Stripe Reader Interface<br />

• Motion Detector<br />

• Touch Screen Interface<br />

Cash Drawer Support<br />

An integrated retail specific feature of the processor is the cash drawer<br />

circuitry. The onboard circuitry internal to the board provides the<br />

control for two external cash drawers. A portion of the POS Board<br />

header (J6) is provided on the board to interface to the dual cash<br />

drawer connector. Header J6 only contains the control signals; it does<br />

not provide power. Software controls the cash drawer(s) through I/O<br />

port 00Exh. This means it can be I/O ports E0/E1h, E2/E3h, E4/E5h, or<br />

EA/EBh depending on the configuration of the SMC I/O controllerʹs<br />

GPIO port(s). Default setting is E0/E1h.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-21<br />

Cash Drawer I/O Port Bit Definition:<br />

Bit # Description Bit = 1 Bit = 0<br />

7 Solenoid B Control Turns off solenoid<br />

output<br />

6 Solenoid A Control Turns off solenoid<br />

output<br />

Activates solenoid<br />

output<br />

Activates solenoid<br />

output<br />

5 Reserved Reserved Reserved<br />

4 Reserved Reserved Reserved<br />

3 Solenoid B Status Solenoid B output<br />

active<br />

2 Solenoid A Status Solenoid A output<br />

active<br />

Solenoid B output<br />

inactive<br />

Solenoid A output<br />

inactive<br />

1 Reserved Reserved Reserved<br />

0 Cash Drawer(s) Status Drawer(s) open Drawer(s) closed<br />

Note: Bits 2 and 3 are set to ʹ1ʹ by each device reset.<br />

The cash drawer interface can be diagnosed remotely. For security<br />

reasons, the cash drawer diagnostics mode must first be activated by<br />

pressing an external momentary switch (SW2). The intention is for<br />

authorized personnel to be present when the cash drawer diagnostic<br />

tests take place.<br />

There is only one cash drawer status signal; therefore, bit 0 is the status<br />

of either cash drawer or both cash drawers.


1-22 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Power LED<br />

The Processor Board provides support for an external power LED<br />

through the onboard Motion/Power LED connector. This LED is<br />

controlled through the SMC 37C935 GPIO pins. Once the SMC chip is<br />

programmed to support the Power LED function on GPIO pin 13, the<br />

LED will be turned ʺonʺ anytime all power to the Processor Board is<br />

good. The systemʹs power management software has the option to turn<br />

the LED off indicating the system is in a power‐managed mode.<br />

MSR<br />

The MSR interface supports a maximum of 3 tracks of magnetic stripe<br />

information for support of ISO format cards. Activate the MSR<br />

interface by enabling it in BIOS Setup under IO Configuration. The<br />

MSR interface controller is a memory‐mapped device, which can reside<br />

at system memory addresses CA000, CC000, or D0000. If MSR<br />

capability is not desired, it may be disabled through BIOS Setup.<br />

Graphics Subsystem<br />

The Release 2.0 – 2.4 processor boards are equipped with an SMI Lynx<br />

SVGA LCD/CRT 3DM graphics controller with 8 MB of integrated<br />

synchronous graphics DRAM.<br />

The Release 2.5 processor board has an SMI Lynx 3DM/3DM+ graphics<br />

controller.<br />

The Processor Boards support linear addressing by creating a ʺholeʺ in<br />

the memory address space at the 63 MB boundary. When the system is<br />

configured for 64 MB and linear addressing is enabled, the last 1 MB of<br />

system memory is unusable; therefore, the board will report that total<br />

available system memory is 63 MB.<br />

Because a hole in memory creates a non‐contiguous address space,<br />

enabling linear addressing when total system DRAM is greater than 64<br />

MB is not recommended. Video linear addressing is enabled through<br />

PC Setup under the Integrated Peripherals menu.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-23<br />

The processor also supports VESA standards such as the VESA DPMS<br />

protocol to place a DPMS compliant monitor into power savings<br />

modes.<br />

Release 2.5 processor boards with the Lynx 3DM/3DM+ chip support<br />

the following DirectX 6 Direct Draw and Direct 3D graphics functions.<br />

• Rasterization acceleration<br />

• Z buffer<br />

• Alpha comparison<br />

• Texture filtering<br />

• Texture blending<br />

• Mimap support<br />

• Vertex and Global fogs<br />

• Diffuse and specular color<br />

• Alpha blending<br />

• Triangle and line drawing<br />

The following DirectX 8 functions are not supported:<br />

• TnL<br />

• Vertex shader<br />

• Pixel shader<br />

• Bump mapping<br />

• Box mapping<br />

The Release 1.0 Pentium processor board was equipped with a C&T<br />

69000/65555 SVGA LCD/CRT graphics controller with 2 MB of<br />

integrated synchronous graphics DRAM. The 69000/65555 is a 32‐bit<br />

graphics controller that combines a VGA controller, 32‐bit graphics<br />

engine, dual‐frequency clock synthesizer, and true‐color DAC in a<br />

single package. This processor board has been discontinued.


1-24 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Resolutions Supported<br />

Resolution Colors Max Vfreq<br />

800x600x8bpp 256 85 Hz<br />

800x600x16bpp 64 k 85 Hz<br />

800x600x24bpp 16 M 85 Hz<br />

Colors Supported<br />

Resolution<br />

256 Colors<br />

(8-Bit)<br />

65,000 Colors<br />

(16-Bit)<br />

16.7 M Colors<br />

(24-Bit)<br />

800x600 512 k 1 MB 2 MB<br />

Dual Displays<br />

The Summa II Motherboard (Release 2.5) is dual display (LCD and<br />

CRT) capable. In a dual display environment the <strong>7401</strong> terminal<br />

supports 16‐bit color when both displays are connected to the<br />

motherboard. Both displays must have the same maximum resolution<br />

capability. Refer to the following information for details about the<br />

implementation of a dual display configuration.<br />

• Lynx Family Control Panel Specification 1.2 on the NCR 74xx Base<br />

System and Client Third party Drivers CD‐ROM (Product ID:<br />

D370‐0111‐0100) or in the video.exe self‐extracting Video Drivers<br />

file on the Retail Solutions Specific Third Party Products Drivers and<br />

Patches web site at:<br />

http://www.<strong>ncr</strong>..com/support/support_drivers_patches.asp?Class=retail_TPP.<br />

• Retail Customer Information Display User’s Guide (BD20‐1431‐B) on<br />

the NCR Information Products web site at:<br />

http://www.info.<strong>ncr</strong>.com/eHome.cfm


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-25<br />

Board BIOS<br />

Processor boards use a Phoenix BIOS, which is stored in Flash ROM<br />

and easily upgraded through the network connection or serial port.<br />

The Flash EEPROM also contains the Setup utility, Power‐On Self Tests<br />

(POST), and APM 1.2 (Release 2.0‐2.4) or ACPI 2.0 (Release 2.5). The<br />

boards also supports system BIOS shadowing, permitting the BIOS to<br />

execute from onboard write‐protected DRAM.<br />

The BIOS displays a sign‐on message during POST identifying the type<br />

of BIOS and a four‐digit revision code.<br />

FLASH memory Implementation<br />

The Intel E28F800B5‐T70 Flash component is organized onboard as<br />

1024 k x 8 (1 MB). While a typical PC BIOS image including video and<br />

LAN boot ROM code normally fits in 256 kB on the Pentium board and<br />

512 kB on the Pentium III/Celeron board, the boards support a 1 MB<br />

flash ROM. The current Phoenix BIOS release only requires 256 kB of<br />

this 1 MB total. The Flash device contains the PC System BIOS along<br />

with the Video BIOS and LAN boot ROM which compresses the ROM<br />

images into a single binary image.<br />

The Flash device is divided into four areas, as described below.<br />

System Address FLASH Memory Area<br />

F0000H FFFFFH 64 kB Main BIOS<br />

EE000H EFFFFH 8 kB System BIOS Reserved during boot<br />

ED000H EDFFFH 4 kB Plug and Play ESCD Storage Area<br />

E0000H ECFFFH 52 kB System/VGA BIOS Reserved during boot


1-26 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

BIOS Upgrades<br />

Flash memory makes distributing BIOS upgrades easy. A new version<br />

of the BIOS can be installed from the hard disk, network or through a<br />

serial port.<br />

The disk‐based Flash upgrade utilities, Phlash.exe and WinPhlash,exe,<br />

ensure the upgrade BIOS extension matches the target system to<br />

prevent accidentally installing a BIOS for a different type of system.<br />

Setup Utility<br />

The ROM‐based Setup utility allows the system configuration to be<br />

modified without opening the system for most basic changes. The<br />

Setup utility is accessible only during the Power‐On Self Test (POST)<br />

by pressing the key after the POST memory test has begun and<br />

before boot begins. A prompt may be enabled that informs users to<br />

press the key to access Setup.<br />

An external alphanumeric keyboard is recommended for running the<br />

BIOS CMOS Setup Utility. Otherwise, a Touch Screen can be used.<br />

Plug and Play<br />

The Processor BIOS also has a setup option to support the Windows<br />

runtime plug and play utilities. When this option is selected, only<br />

devices critical to boot are assigned resources by the BIOS. Device<br />

Node information is available for all devices to ensure compatibility<br />

with Windows 95. System configuration information is stored in ESCD<br />

format. The ESCD data will be cleared upon loss of the CMOS voltage.<br />

Advanced Power Management<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> Release 2.0 – 2.4 Processor BIOS has support for both 1.1 and<br />

1.2 Advanced Power Management (APM). The version of APM drivers<br />

loaded in the operating system determines to which specification the<br />

BIOS adheres. In either case, the energy saving Standby mode can be<br />

initiated by a time‐out period set by the user.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-27<br />

When in Stand By mode, the Processor Board reduces power<br />

consumption by using the processor System Management Mode<br />

(SMM) capabilities and also spinning down hard drives and turning off<br />

VESA DPMS compliant monitors. During setup, the user may select<br />

which DPMS mode (Stand By, Suspend, Auto, or Off) is sent to the<br />

monitor. The ability to respond to external interrupts is fully<br />

maintained while in Stand By mode permitting the system to service<br />

requests such as in‐coming data or network messages while<br />

unattended. Keyboard or mouse activity may also be used to take the<br />

system out of the energy saving Stand By mode. When this occurs, the<br />

monitor and IDE drives are turned back on immediately.<br />

Advanced Power Management is achieved by the following:<br />

• DOS requires a driver (FS‐APM.dos)<br />

• NT requires a driver (NCRSYSM.SYS)<br />

• Windows 2000 must enable the operating system APM setting. The<br />

OS APM setting is disabled by default. NCR Gold Drivers are<br />

enabled in this setting by selecting:<br />

Start, Control Panel, Power Options, APM tab and check the box<br />

Enable Advance Power Management Support<br />

Click Ok to finish.<br />

ACPI<br />

The Release 2.5 terminal BIOS supports Advance Configuration Power<br />

Interface (ACPI) 2.0 power management. Primary differences between<br />

APM and ACPI are as follows:<br />

• On an APM‐ managed terminal, the BIOS determines when to<br />

switch between power states and also performs the switch. When<br />

using ACPI, the operating system determines when to switch and<br />

informs the BIOS to perform the switch.<br />

• APM must be enabled in the BIOS. ACPI is automatically active<br />

with the operating system.<br />

• ACPI Setup options are available in the OS Control Panel.


1-28 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

ACPI provides similar modes of operation as APM. The <strong>7401</strong> hardware<br />

supports four Power Management States.<br />

State<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

• APM Auto<br />

state<br />

• ACPI G0/S0<br />

Working state<br />

CONSERVE<br />

• APM Standby<br />

state<br />

• ACPI G1/S1<br />

Sleeping state<br />

SOFT OFF<br />

• APM Suspend<br />

State<br />

• ACPI G2/S5<br />

Soft Off state<br />

Characteristics<br />

AC power is not present. All RAM contents are lost.<br />

Power is on and fully supplied to all <strong>7401</strong> components. The display and<br />

touch panel are active. The CPU may be fully on or be in chip standby mode.<br />

This is transparent to the user and the application. Standby mode reduces<br />

power requirements and is controlled by the chip set and is entered/exited<br />

depending on the CPU’s utilization level. Transitioning between fully on<br />

and standby causes no delay.<br />

Power is on, but consumption is reduced by throttling back or completely<br />

stopping the system clock. Throttling is fully programmable. This is the<br />

primary means of reducing system power consumption and is used to help<br />

correct a high temperature warning level detected by the temperature<br />

monitor. Temperature may also be reduced by dimming the LCD. There is<br />

no user or application action required for this mode. When a Safe<br />

Temperature is detected, the system switches back to the ON state.<br />

Transitioning between ON and CONSERVE takes less than 10 milliseconds.<br />

Temperature has reached a critically high level, a LAN‐based Powerdown was<br />

received, or a system Shutdown occurred. Power consumption is reduced<br />

to its lowest level. All voltages are still present, but BIOS places each<br />

peripheral and chip into its lowest available power state. The chip set enters<br />

the Suspend‐to‐RAM mode. The LCD back light is turned off, blanking the<br />

display. RAM contents are preserved upon return to ON state unless<br />

software issues a reset. If this state was entered because of a LAN‐based<br />

Powerdown or system Shutdown, transitioning to the ON state can occur via<br />

LAN‐based reset or wakeup, Timer wake‐up, Touch activity, Motion<br />

Sensor, or keyboard. If SOFT OFF was entered because of a Critical<br />

Temperature, the ON state can be automatically transitioned to when a Safe<br />

Temperature is reached.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-29<br />

Operator Display<br />

NCR<br />

Tilt Mount<br />

Fixed-Angle Mount<br />

18289<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐2xxx and 3xxx have either a 12.1‐inch TFT (active matrix) or a<br />

15‐inch TFT.<br />

LCD Adapter Board<br />

The signals from the LCD header on the Processor Board are brought<br />

to the LCD on a harness. Since there are multiple pin configurations<br />

and connector types being used on the LCD, a small adapter board is<br />

used to receive the LCD harness and map the signals into the correct<br />

pin‐out for the LCD panel. This board has a connector that plugs<br />

directly into the LCD panel.<br />

LCD Backlight Inverter Module<br />

An Inverter Board supplies power for the LCD Backlight, which is a<br />

separate module in the terminal. The inverter has a connector that<br />

receives power, ground, and a Backlight dimming signal from the<br />

Processor Board. The inverter generates the high voltage necessary to<br />

start and run dual CCFL (cold‐cathode fluorescent lamps) Backlights.


1-30 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

A fuse located on the Inverter Board protects power to the inverter.<br />

This fuse protects the system from damage in the event of a Backlight<br />

or Inverter Board fault. The fuse is not field replaceable; if it blows, the<br />

safety characteristics of one or more components on the Inverter Board<br />

may have been compromised and the Inverter Board should be<br />

replaced.<br />

If one or both Backlight tubes become disconnected or otherwise opencircuited,<br />

protection circuitry shuts down the inverter. This avoids<br />

over‐powering a single tube and also protects against high voltage<br />

shorting.<br />

The Backlight tubes for the Active displays (TFT) can be replaced.<br />

Touch Screen<br />

The Touch Screen completely covers the LCD and is mounted directly<br />

in front of the LCD, behind the front plastic bezel of the terminal. The<br />

touch controller on the Processor Board supports capacitive and<br />

resistive touch glass.<br />

The touch glass has an integrated harness that is routed into the<br />

Processor Board enclosure and is connected to a header on the<br />

Processor Board.<br />

The touch glass has a glare‐reducing texture that also helps hide<br />

fingerprints.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-31<br />

Features<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader<br />

A single 3‐track analog MSR is available as a feature, supporting ISO<br />

format cards. When the MSR is not desired, a filler piece for the MSR<br />

section is included to make the unit appear uniform.<br />

NCR<br />

MSR<br />

MSR<br />

18291


1-32 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Printer Options<br />

The sections that follow provide an illustration and brief description of<br />

the available printer options.<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-K590 Self-Service Printer<br />

The K590 Printer is a self‐service, fast, silent, thermal printer that<br />

provides ʺunattended printing.ʺ The printer is housed in a secure<br />

cabinet that does not allow customer access to the paper while it is<br />

printing. It can print text, graphics and bar codes. It prints on paper<br />

that is 80 mm, 82.5 mm, or 114 mm wide. When printing is complete, a<br />

receipt presenter provides the cut receipt. The printer receives its<br />

power from an external power supply and has a serial interface.<br />

19055


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-33<br />

7158 Printer<br />

The 7158 Printer is extremely fast, quiet, and reliable point‐of‐sale<br />

device. It consists of two specialized printers in one compact package: a<br />

thermal printer on top that prints receipts, and an impact slip printer in<br />

front to print on forms and checks that you insert. It receives its power<br />

from an external power supply, can be connected through a USB or<br />

serial port, and has a connector for cash drawers.<br />

17304<br />

7167 Printer<br />

The NCR 7167 Printer is a fast, quiet, relatively small and very reliable<br />

multi‐function printer. It prints receipts, validates and prints checks,<br />

and prints on a variety of single or multiple part forms. There is no<br />

journal as it is kept electronically by the host terminal. The printer<br />

features a dual interface, so it can connect to the host terminal either<br />

through a USB interface or RS‐232. It receives its power from an<br />

external power supply, and has a connector for cash drawers.<br />

19711e


1-34 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

7194 Printer<br />

The 7194 Printer is a high speed, high‐resolution printer, capable of<br />

both text and graphics printing. It offers direct thermal printing in a<br />

receipt station. It receives its power from an external power supply,<br />

can be connected through a USB or serial port, and has a connector for<br />

cash drawers.<br />

16437<br />

7197 Printer<br />

The NCR 7197 Printer is a fast, quiet, relatively small and very reliable<br />

multi‐function printer. It prints receipts and two‐color printing. The<br />

printer features a dual interface, so it can connect to the host terminal<br />

either through a USB interface or RS‐232. It receives its power from an<br />

external power supply, and has a connector for cash drawers.<br />

19712e


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-35<br />

Other Integrated Devices and Indicators<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d Disk Drive<br />

A 2.5‐inch IDE hard disk is available to support Windows NT. The<br />

drive is the standard type that is used by notebook PCs.<br />

Reset Switch<br />

As a last resort, the Reset Switch can be used to reboot the system if the<br />

software reset port mechanisms fail. The switch is on the connector<br />

row at the bottom of the enclosure. Intentionally, it is not easily<br />

accessible, but can be operated without removing covers or using<br />

special tools.<br />

Reset Switch<br />

16454<br />

Except when testing software in a lab environment, always disconnect<br />

the AC power cord.<br />

Reset Procedure<br />

1. Gently press the Reset Switch and hold it in for at least four<br />

seconds. The screen goes blank.<br />

2. Release the Reset Switch and then gently press it again. The system<br />

reboots.


1-36 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Internal Speaker<br />

The Internal Speaker is connected to the PC speaker output of the<br />

system chipset, not to the audio subsystem. It is connected to the<br />

Processor Board via a harness and mounted inside the Processor Board<br />

enclosure.<br />

POS Connector Board<br />

The POS Connector Board is a small daughter board that mounts<br />

directly on the Cash Drawer and Parallel Port header. Connectors on<br />

the edge of this board form a second connector row above the<br />

Processor Board connectors. Connectors are available for two cash<br />

drawers, a customer display and a microphone.<br />

Power for the cash drawers (24 V) and VFD customer display (5 V and<br />

12 V) is supplied by the Enhanced Power Supply through the parallel<br />

connector.<br />

Motion Sensor<br />

The terminal hardware can detect movement near the terminal and<br />

enables software to prompt system operation from a low‐power state.<br />

Application software may also be able to make use of motion detection<br />

when in the ON state if it is enabled by lower‐level software.<br />

NCR<br />

Motion Sensor<br />

Power/Status LED<br />

18290


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-37<br />

Motion is detected as a change in ambient light level that is greater<br />

than a software‐controlled threshold.<br />

A photodiode mounted behind the front bezel of the unit senses<br />

ambient light levels. The photodiode resides on a small circuit board<br />

(the Motion Sensor Board). A harness connects the Motion Sensor<br />

Board to the amplifier and motion sensing logic on the Processor<br />

Board. The user Power/Status LED indicator shares this board.<br />

Power/Status LED<br />

The LED power indicator indicates that power is present. The LED is<br />

green when the processor and BIOS are operating properly. The LED is<br />

mounted behind the front bezel on the same board as the motion<br />

sensor.<br />

Power OK LED<br />

The Power OK LED is located behind the Cable Cover, between the<br />

Customer Display and Cash Drawer connectors.<br />

Power OK LED<br />

(5V and 24V)<br />

16453


1-38 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

LAN Status LEDs<br />

LAN Integrity<br />

(Green)<br />

LAN Speed:<br />

Yellow = 100 MB<br />

OFF = 10 MB<br />

16455<br />

Power Supply<br />

The terminal uses an AC adapter for its power supply, concealed in the<br />

terminal mounting. The supply is inaccessible when the terminal is in<br />

the normal operation and mounting position to prevent tampering, and<br />

sealed to help protect against spills or other environmental hazards.<br />

Note: The power supply automatically senses the proper AC voltage;<br />

therefore only normal servicing access is required.<br />

All power required to operate the base unit, PCMCIA option and<br />

PCMCIA cards, speaker option, scanner option, and bus‐powered USB<br />

peripherals is provided by the power supply.<br />

The Processor Board serves as the hub to distribute power to all<br />

terminal functions. Cash drawers, VFD customer display, PS/2<br />

keyboard, PCMCIA daughter board and slots, scanner (through RS‐232<br />

port), USB, hard disk, and the LCD all receive power through their<br />

respective Processor Board connectors.


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-39<br />

Uninterruptible Power System (Optional)<br />

The 4055 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) protects your<br />

equipment from various power related problems, providing visual and<br />

audible indicators which alert you to utility‐line failures. The 4055 is<br />

installed inside the pedestal mount, and includes a data line/LAN<br />

connection which ensures both the AC and data paths are protected<br />

from surges and noise transmitted through the power lines.<br />

Integrated Scanner Module (Optional)<br />

The scanner, power supply, and Scanner Controller Board are located<br />

inside the Fixed‐Angle Mount. The scanner interface is serial, and is<br />

connected to RS‐232/1, which is a powered serial port.<br />

Note: The Integrated Scanner feature includes the Fixed‐Angle Mount<br />

and cannot be used with the Table Top Mount.<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> Scanner is a modified NCR 7890 or NCR 7892 Scanner,<br />

however, there are a few differences. Refer to the NCR <strong>7401</strong>/7890 or<br />

7892 Scanner Differences chapter for additional information.<br />

Integrated Speaker Module (Optional)<br />

The Integrated Speaker feature provides two stereo speakers that<br />

attach to the bottom of the Core Module. The maximum output of the<br />

speakers is approximately 6 watts per channel.<br />

Compact Flash (Optional)<br />

The 256MB compact flash can be used in a Windows XP embedded<br />

environment. When using the Windows XP embedded OS, an<br />

additional 128MB SDRAM SODIMM is required to support the<br />

necessary virtual memory requirements. The 256MB compact flash<br />

replaces the hard drive in the unit.


1-40 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

USB RS-232 Port Server<br />

The USB RS‐232 Port Server is an intelligent, stackable expansion<br />

module that connects to the terminal Universal Serial Bus (USB) port,<br />

providing high‐speed RS‐232 serial ports.<br />

7454/<strong>7401</strong><br />

USB Port<br />

RS-232 Ports<br />

16944


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-41<br />

Integrated CD-ROM Drive (Tilt Mount Model)<br />

The Integrated CD‐ROM Drive is located behind a cover on the Back<br />

Panel. To access the drive, loosen the spring‐loaded CD Cover Screw<br />

and remove the CD Cover by sliding it up as shown.<br />

CD Cover Screw<br />

CD Cover<br />

19230


1-42 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Additional Connectors (Pentium III Board)<br />

The Pentium III Boards have three connectors that are not on the other<br />

Pentium Boards. Also available is a fourth connector for a microphone<br />

when a POS Connector Board is mounted to the Processor Board. The<br />

following illustration identifies these connectors.<br />

S-Video<br />

RS-232 Connector<br />

(COM 3 and COM 4)<br />

Microphone<br />

(optional)<br />

IRDA<br />

17999<br />

The following is a brief description of each connector.<br />

S-Video<br />

This connector provides a video connection to an S‐video monitor.<br />

RS-232 Connector<br />

This connector provides two additional RS‐232 ports. To add the<br />

ports, install the Dual RS‐232 Port Kit (7454‐F072) as described in<br />

the Feature Kits appendix. The Dual RS‐232 Cable provides two<br />

additional serial ports.<br />

Microphone<br />

This connector provides for audio input.<br />

IRDA<br />

This connector permits infrared communication between devices.<br />

18002


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-43<br />

Compatibility<br />

LAN Communications<br />

The software associated with the terminal systems conform to the<br />

following standards:<br />

• Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS 4)<br />

• IEEE 802.3 & 802.3u CSMA/CD (10/100 MB/s Ethernet)<br />

• IEEE 802.2 Link Level Control (LLC)<br />

• TCP/IP<br />

Application Programmability<br />

The software associated with the terminal systems conform to the<br />

following standards:<br />

• OLE for Retail POS 1.4<br />

• JavaPOS for Retail 1.4<br />

• HTML 4.0<br />

• ECMA Script<br />

• Java Development Kit 1.1.3<br />

Operating System Information<br />

The software associated with the terminal systems conform to the<br />

following standards:<br />

• Microsoft Windows NT<br />

• Microsoft Windows 2000<br />

• Windows Xpe


1-44 Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview<br />

Migration<br />

Retail Applications<br />

Retail Peripherals<br />

• Existing TAPS‐based applications are not supported. These<br />

applications must be migrated to Windows NT.<br />

• Existing Windows 3.11‐based NICE applications are not supported.<br />

These applications must be migrated to Windows NT.<br />

• Existing OPOS‐based applications can be supported on terminals<br />

running Windows NT.<br />

• Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XPe are the only<br />

supported operating systems.<br />

Since the system is a dedicated platform with limited expansion<br />

capability, a limited subset of the retail peripherals is supported. No<br />

support is provided for the following peripheral types:<br />

• OCIA Peripherals<br />

• RS‐485 Peripherals<br />

• Wedge Keyboard<br />

• Operator Line Display


Chapter 1: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx Product Overview 1-45<br />

Retail Systems<br />

This release of software does not support the following features found<br />

in previous retail systems:<br />

Platform<br />

• ISA Cards<br />

• Standard PCI Cards<br />

• Multi‐port Serial<br />

• Memory Dump<br />

Networks<br />

• M‐11<br />

• StarLAN<br />

• 10base2 Ethernet<br />

• Token Ring<br />

• NetBEUI /Net BIOS<br />

• NetWare<br />

Platform Load<br />

• SLP, SLF, RPL<br />

• PCMCIA Disk, PCMCIA Flash Disk


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Introduction<br />

19889d<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx model is a ruggedized version ideal for unattended use<br />

in financial environments. The major hardware features of this model<br />

are a 15 inch flat panel display with touch screen input, LAN<br />

connectivity, stereo audio, an integrated secure cabinet, an 80‐column<br />

printer, a motorized MSR or card‐swipe MSR, an integrated Pin Pad,<br />

and the integrated rugged keyboard with trackball.


2-2 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Serial Number/Model Number Label<br />

The unitʹs serial number, model number, tracer number, and date of<br />

manufacture are included on a label located inside the cabinet on the<br />

left side above the printer module.<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-4512-8001<br />

50-12345678<br />

Class/Model<br />

Serial Number<br />

Date: 03/15/02<br />

F015,F026,F105,F122,F202,F431,F595<br />

Mfg<br />

Date Manufactured<br />

Feature Number(s)<br />

19890<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Model Numbers<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4512 15‐in. Capacitive LCD, CD‐ROM, 4 Serial Ports, Parallel<br />

Port, Ethernet Cable<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4665 15‐in. Capacitive LCD, CD‐ROM, 4 Serial Ports, Parallel<br />

Port, Ethernet Cable, Celeron 700 MHz, and 10 GB HDD<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4675 15‐in. Capacitive LCD, CD‐ROM, 4 Serial Ports, Parallel<br />

Port, Ethernet Cable, PIII 1 GHz, and 20 GB HDD


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-3<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Modules<br />

Base Unit<br />

• Processor Board<br />

− Pentium III/Celeron processor<br />

− XGA chipset (15‐inch monitor)<br />

− MPEGII chipset<br />

− 1 MB Flash BIOS (not CMOS)<br />

− Four RS‐232 ports (two optionally powered)<br />

− 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN chipset, Wake‐on‐LAN support, and<br />

RJ‐45 port<br />

− PC Audio with an internal mono speaker<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

SoundBlaster ® 16 compatible audio chipset<br />

Two USB type A ports<br />

PS/2 keyboard port<br />

External VGA display port<br />

Dual display support<br />

External stereo speaker port<br />

Internal PS/2 mouse (dedicated to the touch screen)<br />

One SODIMM (Small Outline DIMM) RAM socket<br />

64 MB memory on board<br />

IDE support for a hard disk, a CD ROM, and an optional flash<br />

disk<br />

• POS Connector Board<br />

− Internal parallel port (dedicated to the optional customer<br />

display)<br />

− Microphone<br />

• 15‐inch Operator Display – active LCD with capacitive or resistive<br />

touch


2-4 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Options<br />

• 2.5‐inch low or high capacity hard disk<br />

• Integrated Motion Sensor, capable of waking up the terminal from<br />

a low power state<br />

• Integrated CD‐ROM<br />

• Integrated Infrared Sensor<br />

• Integrated Power Supply<br />

• Full Page Printer<br />

• Reset switch which can be used to recover from a lock‐up condition<br />

• Table‐top mount<br />

• 3‐meter Ethernet cable<br />

• U.S. power cord<br />

• Integrated 3‐track ISO MSR<br />

• Motorized Card Reader<br />

• 64/128 MB or 256 MB memory<br />

• 256 MB Compact Flash<br />

• Ruggedized Keyboard<br />

• Pin Pad<br />

• Trackball


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-5<br />

Terminal Components not Supported<br />

It is important to note that the terminal does not support the following<br />

components.<br />

Not Supported<br />

CMOS for hard totals, logs,<br />

and tallies<br />

Removable media, e.g., a<br />

flex disk<br />

SLP terminal loading<br />

Keylock for security (X, L,<br />

R, S)<br />

ISA and PCI Expansion<br />

slots<br />

DVD ROM<br />

Internal UPS<br />

Manual Video and audio<br />

controls<br />

DOS, Windows 3.1,<br />

Windows NT 3.51,<br />

Windows 9x, OS/2<br />

133/266 MHz Pentium<br />

Processors<br />

Alternative Implementation<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d disk, compact flash, or server<br />

storage<br />

LAN communication to an NT server<br />

via standard protocols<br />

Local storage, TCP/IP networking and<br />

PXE loading<br />

Reset switch based security<br />

USB and LAN based devices (future)<br />

External UPS<br />

Software controlled<br />

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,<br />

Windows XPe<br />

Intel Pentium III 500/700 MHz, 1 GHz,<br />

and Celeron 450/550/600/700 MHz<br />

processors


2-6 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

System Configuration Diagram<br />

Full Page<br />

Printer<br />

Power<br />

Supply<br />

Power<br />

LAN<br />

Parallel<br />

Speaker<br />

Speakers<br />

IRDA<br />

IRDA<br />

Receiver<br />

Processor Board<br />

MSR<br />

Swipe<br />

MSR<br />

S-Video<br />

(Powered)<br />

COM1<br />

USB 1<br />

USB 2<br />

RS-232 Ports<br />

(Powered)<br />

COM2 COM3 COM4<br />

USB<br />

Camera<br />

(Kit)<br />

Trackball<br />

Pin Pad<br />

Motorized<br />

Card<br />

Reader<br />

Power<br />

Supply<br />

19794b


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-7<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Module Descriptions<br />

Processor Board<br />

Processor/Chip Set<br />

The terminal uses an Intel architecture processor, which permits it to<br />

leverage existing software drivers and applications, as well as provide<br />

the greatest flexibility in choosing an operating system. This provides<br />

several other advantages:<br />

• Capable of SW MPEG‐1 or MPEG‐2 playback at 30 frames per<br />

second with 22 kHz stereo audio (may be limited by OS<br />

constraints).<br />

• SoundBlaster ® ‐compatible audio<br />

• Expansion capabilities for optional features and future<br />

requirements (ISA/PCI bus and USB)<br />

Release 2.4<br />

• Intel Pentium III 500 MHz or 700 MHz Processor, or Intel Celeron<br />

550 MHz or 600 MHz Processor (µPGA package) used with the<br />

Intel 440BX PC chipset. The 440BX chipset consists of the 82440BX<br />

System Controller (North Bridge chip), also called the MTXC, and<br />

the 82371AB (South Bridge chip), also called the PIIX4.<br />

• A 100 MHz system bus<br />

• 64 MB memory with ability to add SODIMMS to i<strong>ncr</strong>ease the<br />

memory capacity of the terminal


2-8 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Release 2.5<br />

• Intel 700 MHz Celeron Processor or Intel 1 GHz Pentium III<br />

Processor (BGA package) on board, removing the µPGA processor<br />

socket. Intel 440BX chipset same as in Release 2.4<br />

• 100 MHz system bus and memory support, 64‐bit bus width, and<br />

AGP video interface.<br />

• 128 MB memory with ability to expand like Release 2.4.<br />

Video Subsystem<br />

The video subsystem supports the following LCD types:<br />

• 15‐inch active matrix (TFT) 768x1024 with 64 k colors<br />

Support for the LCD integrated display is provided internally. External<br />

support for SVGA monitors (800x600 [or better] resolution and 64 k [or<br />

better] colors) is provided by a CRT 15‐Pin D‐shell connector.<br />

The LCD back lighting is also software controlled. In addition to OFF<br />

and ON modes, a dimmed mode is supported in the hardware to allow<br />

i<strong>ncr</strong>eased tube life. If appropriate software drivers are loaded, full<br />

brightness is restored when touched, motion detection (Motion Sensor<br />

section), or an application request (i.e., to play promotional material on<br />

a preset schedule).<br />

Ethernet 10/100Base-T LAN Communications<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal has an Intel 82559 LAN Controller that<br />

supports 10/100Base‐T Ethernet. Ethernet 100Base‐T is also known as<br />

ʺFast Ethernet.ʺ The Boot ROM for diskless boot functionality is<br />

included in the 1 MB system ROM. The hardware is compatible with<br />

the TCP/IP, DHCP, and TFTP protocols required for remote boot of the<br />

platform. Appropriate software must be used to enable each protocol<br />

used over the Ethernet link.<br />

The terminal may be connected to either a 10 MB/s or 100 MB/s<br />

Ethernet connection. The hardware automatically selects the correct<br />

speed (if enabled by software to do so).


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-9<br />

The LAN hardware supports wakeup packet capability as defined in<br />

the Device Class Power Management Specification, Network Device<br />

Class (available from Microsoftʹs web site).<br />

When the platform is in the Soft OFF state (refer to the Advanced Power<br />

Management section that follows), receipt of a Wakeup Packet on the<br />

LAN can return the system to the ON state, if this feature is enabled by<br />

software.<br />

Due to limitations of the LAN controller and the OS, all features<br />

described in the Network Device Class specification may not be<br />

available.<br />

100Base‐T is wired identically to 10Base‐T, except that the twisted pair<br />

cable must be Category 5 and the hubs must permit 100 or 10/100 MB/s<br />

operation. Although 10Base‐T will operate on Category 3 twisted pair,<br />

or NCR ʺ747ʺ cable, an upgrade to Category 5 is required for 100Base‐<br />

T.<br />

A customer desiring to use the terminal in an existing 10Base‐T<br />

environment can do so and simply run at 10 MB. In order to upgrade to<br />

100MB/s, Category 5 cable and 100 or 10/100 hubs must be installed.<br />

NCR strongly recommends the use of Category 5 for all new cabling,<br />

even if the customer initially intends to run only 10Base‐T.<br />

LED Indicators for Link Integrity (verifies cable and hub connection are<br />

good) and LAN speed is provided on the Processor Board near the row<br />

of connectors at the bottom of the e‐box. The LED is ON (yellow) when<br />

the speed is running at 100 MB/s.<br />

Link Integrity is provided to the PC chipset to permit boot‐up software<br />

to verify the presence of the LAN connection. Software must allow 2<br />

seconds after power‐up in order for the Link Integrity signal to become<br />

valid.


2-10 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Wireless LAN Communications<br />

When a wired Ethernet connection is not desired, a wireless LAN<br />

adapter may be installed in the PCMCIA socket. This requires that the<br />

PCMCIA daughter‐card feature be installed. A wireless LAN used in<br />

the terminal must meet the following requirements:<br />

• Integrated antenna that meets the requirements of PCMCIA (PC<br />

Card) Extended Type 2 card definition (a maximum of 5‐cm<br />

additional length).<br />

• Power consumption within the capabilities of the PCMCIA<br />

daughter‐card.<br />

• Signaling requirements within the capabilities of the terminal<br />

PCMCIA interface. The main restriction is that DMA transactions<br />

are not supported over the PCMCIA interface.<br />

• Device drivers for the targeted operating system must exist.<br />

• Appropriate infrastructure (server support, Base Stations, Ceiling<br />

Antennas, etc) must be present in the installation site, and the<br />

maximum RF range of the wireless system must not be exceeded.<br />

Interoperability ‐ While the 802.11 standard provides an interoperable<br />

protocol definition, there are vendor‐specific extensions to the protocol<br />

that encourage users to stay with one supplierʹs equipment. This also<br />

applies to wireless infrastructure and access points, 802.11 does not<br />

govern this operation. Mixing of RF suppliers on a site is not<br />

recommended until the RF suppliers have demonstrated<br />

interoperability.<br />

The wireless networks operate at speeds of 1‐2 MB/s with 2 percent<br />

packet loss typical. The application developer must be aware of the<br />

performance limitations and design applications that are acceptable to<br />

the customer when run over the slower network.<br />

Remote Wakeup over the wireless network is not possible because the<br />

cards do not support it. An alternative is to use the system real‐time<br />

clock wake up at a scheduled time.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-11<br />

Depending on the OS environment, Remote Boot may be supported,<br />

but due to the slow network speed a large boot image may take an<br />

unacceptably long time to load. The application developer needs to<br />

ensure that the load is of reasonable size.<br />

The wired Ethernet connection is not certified for use in configurations<br />

where a wireless adapter is installed.<br />

Universal Serial Bus<br />

Two USB Type‐A ports are provided on the terminal. USB Host<br />

Controller support is provided in hardware on the Processor Board.<br />

Note: Third party USB peripherals require support from the operating<br />

system, which is currently limited to Windows 2000 and Windows<br />

Xpe. The terminal must use the I/O Networks drivers to support the<br />

NCR USB printer and scanner products. These drives are available<br />

under Windows NT, Windows 2000, and Windows XPe.<br />

Serial Ports<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx Celeron/Pentium III processor board provides two RS‐<br />

232 ports (9‐pin D‐shell connectors, Ports 1 and 2) directly on the board<br />

and supports two additional RS‐232 ports. Ports 3 and 4 require an<br />

optional harness connection to the board. Ports 1 and 3 can be supplied<br />

with +12 V DC on Pin 9 when properly set up in the BIOS. The total<br />

power drawn by Ports 1 and/or 3 must be within the limits of the<br />

capabilities of the power supply. Refer to the following table for RS‐232<br />

pin‐out information.<br />

The BIOS permits flexibility in mapping resources. However, a fullyloaded<br />

system (2 PCMCIA cards that require IRQs, four serial ports in<br />

use, USB in use, parallel port in use, and MSR) may not have enough<br />

available IRQs to support all serial ports. Use a USB serial port<br />

expander to overcome this PC architecture limitation.


2-12 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Port 2 shares hardware resources with the IRDA connection; if IRDA is<br />

in use, Port 3 is not available.<br />

RS-232 DB-9 Male Connector Pinout<br />

Pin Port A Port B<br />

1 DCD DCD<br />

2 RXD RXD<br />

3 TXD TXD<br />

4 DTR DTR<br />

5 GND GND<br />

6 DSR DSR<br />

7 RTS RTS<br />

8 CTS CTS<br />

9 RI or +12* RI<br />

* If Port 1 or 3 are powered, pin 9 will be +12 V.<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Monitor<br />

The hardware monitor generates an interrupt to the system whenever<br />

any of the internal voltages used by the system processor goes above or<br />

below the acceptable operating range. An interrupt is also generated<br />

when the temperature of the Processor exceeds safe levels. Software<br />

can use this indication to slow or stop the system and/or force a reset.<br />

PCI Expansion Header<br />

A single expansion header is provided to support optional features,<br />

such as the PCMCIA for Wireless LAN Board. This board supports two<br />

Type 2 or one Type 3 PCMCIA type cards.<br />

IDE Header<br />

A standard IDE header is provided to support a 2.5‐inch hard disk<br />

drive and an integrated CD‐ROM. This header al supports the optional<br />

256 MB IDE compact flash available in place of the hard disk.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-13<br />

Audio<br />

The base unit has SoundBlaster‐compatible audio. Wave table<br />

synthesis is not supported. FM synthesis and MIDI are supported in<br />

the hardware, but requires software driver support to function.<br />

Higher quality integrated stereo speakers may be added as an option to<br />

the terminal. The amplifier is located on the Processor Board; the<br />

speaker output is provided on a header that receives the harness from<br />

the speaker module. In addition, a Line Out is provided on a 3.5 mm<br />

stereo jack that permits connection of external amplified speakers.<br />

The integrated stereo speakers, or an amplifier connected to Line Out,<br />

must be used in order to play SoundBlaster (audio subsystem) audio.<br />

However, an internal EUI speaker provides PC speaker functionality<br />

(beeps and tones) for all configurations.<br />

The volume control can be set during system configuration.<br />

The PC speaker sounds (such as beeps and touch clicks) are directed<br />

into the audio subsystem and are audible if speakers are connected.<br />

• Release 2.0 – 2.4 processor boards use a Cirrus/Crystal CS4614 (PCIbased)<br />

sound controller that supports DirectX 6 sound.<br />

• Release 2.5 processor boards use an ESS Allegro ES1989 sound<br />

controller that supports DirectX 8 sound.<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader<br />

A 3‐track MSR head is available as an option. The ISO card format is<br />

supported.<br />

When card data is read, an interrupt is generated. A software device<br />

driver for the MSR must be loaded to enable the application to process<br />

the data.<br />

Touch Screen Controller<br />

The MicroTouch ʺExcaliburʺ chip is used to interface the touch panel.<br />

This controller supports MicroTouch capacitive panels.


2-14 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

In order to save an RS‐232 port, the touch data is delivered to the<br />

system through the mouse interface. This requires a mouse‐aware<br />

touch device driver for the appropriate OS.<br />

When the system is operating in the dimmed display mode, touch<br />

activity can restore full brightness if instructed by software to do so.<br />

When system is in low power mode, touch activity can generate the<br />

mouse port interrupt (IRQ12).<br />

Processor Board Connectors<br />

All connectors are either keyed or impossible to plug incorrectly due to<br />

mechanical design of the product.<br />

External Connectors<br />

VGA CRT RGB 15 pin D Shell<br />

Ethernet RJ45<br />

Dual USB Type A<br />

External Stereo speaker<br />

(3.5mm jack)<br />

Power supply<br />

RS‐232 9 pin D shell (two, one<br />

with +12 V power option)<br />

PS/2 Keyboard<br />

Customer Display<br />

Cash Drawer<br />

IRDA<br />

20‐pin high density RS‐232<br />

Conversion connector<br />

Microphone<br />

S‐Video<br />

Internal Connectors<br />

LCD<br />

Back light Inverter<br />

Integrated Speaker Module<br />

MSR<br />

Touch screen (PS/2)<br />

Integrated Scanner (<strong>7401</strong>)<br />

Motion Sensor / Power Indicator<br />

PCI Expansion header<br />

IDE<br />

Parallel port (POS Board header)<br />

Cash Drawer port (POS Board<br />

header)


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-15<br />

Flash Disk Interface (Discontinued)<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐45xx processor board provides support for a flash disk array<br />

in the form of an M‐Systems DiskOnChip. A 32‐pin socket is provided<br />

for this feature. The flash disk must be installed and enabled in BIOS<br />

Setup. This feature is not available on the <strong>7401</strong>‐46xx processor boards.<br />

NCR Retail Specific <strong>Har</strong>dware<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx Processor Board contains logic that provides support for<br />

the custom retail interface. The logic controls the following features:<br />

• Magnetic Stripe Reader Interface<br />

• Motion Detector<br />

• Touch Screen Interface<br />

MSR<br />

The MSR interface supports a maximum of 3 tracks of magnetic stripe<br />

information for support of ISO format cards. Activate the MSR<br />

interface by enabling it in BIOS Setup under IO Configuration. The<br />

MSR interface controller is a memory‐mapped device, which can reside<br />

at system memory addresses CA000, CC000, or D0000. If MSR<br />

capability is not desired, it may be disabled through BIOS Setup.<br />

Power LED<br />

The Processor Board provides support for an external power LED<br />

through the onboard Motion/Power LED connector. This LED is<br />

controlled through the SMC 37C935 GPIO pins. Once the SMC chip is<br />

programmed to support the Power LED function on GPIO pin 13, the<br />

LED will be turned ʺonʺ anytime all power to the Processor Board is<br />

good. The systemʹs power management software has the option to turn<br />

the LED off indicating the system is in a power‐managed mode.


2-16 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Graphics Subsystem<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐45xx processor boards are equipped with a SMI Lynx SVGA<br />

LCD/CRT 3DM graphics controller with 8 MB of integrated<br />

synchronous graphics DRAM. The <strong>7401</strong>‐46xx processor boards have an<br />

SMI Lynx 3DM/3DM+ graphics controller.<br />

The processor boards support linear addressing by creating a ʺholeʺ in<br />

the memory address space at the 63 MB boundary. When the system is<br />

configured for 64 MB and linear addressing is enabled, the last 1 MB of<br />

system memory is unusable; therefore, the board will report that total<br />

available system memory is 63 MB.<br />

Because a hole in memory creates a non‐contiguous address space,<br />

enabling linear addressing when total system DRAM is greater than 64<br />

MB is not recommended. Video linear addressing is enabled through<br />

PC Setup under the Integrated Peripherals menu.<br />

The processor also supports VESA standards such as the VESA DPMS<br />

protocol to place a DPMS compliant monitor into power savings<br />

modes.<br />

Resolutions Supported<br />

Resolution Colors Max Vfreq<br />

800x600x8bpp 256 85 Hz<br />

800x600x16bpp 64 k 85 Hz<br />

800x600x24bpp 16 M 85 Hz<br />

Colors Supported<br />

Resolution<br />

256 Colors<br />

(8-Bit)<br />

65,000 Colors<br />

(16-Bit)<br />

16.7 M Colors<br />

(24-Bit)<br />

800x600 512 k 1 MB 2 MB


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-17<br />

DirectX Support<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐46xx processor boards with the Lynx 3DM/3DM+ chip support<br />

the following DirectX 6 Direct Draw and Direct 3D graphics functions.<br />

• Rasterization acceleration<br />

• Z buffer<br />

• Alpha comparison<br />

• Texture filtering<br />

• Texture blending<br />

• Mimap support<br />

• Vertex and Global fogs<br />

• Diffuse and specular color<br />

• Alpha blending<br />

• Triangle and line drawing<br />

The following DirectX 8 functions are not supported:<br />

• TnL<br />

• Vertex shader<br />

• Pixel shader<br />

• Bump mapping<br />

• Box mapping


2-18 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Dual Displays<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐46xx processor boards are dual display (LCD and CRT)<br />

capable. In a dual display environment the <strong>7401</strong> terminal supports<br />

16‐bit color when both displays are connected to the motherboard.<br />

Both displays must have the same maximum resolution capability.<br />

Refer to the following information for details about the implementation<br />

of a dual display configuration.<br />

• Lynx Family Control Panel Specification 1.2 on the NCR 74xx Base<br />

System and Client Third party Drivers CD‐ROM (Product ID:<br />

D370‐0111‐0100) or in the video.exe self‐extracting Video Drivers<br />

file on the Retail Solutions Specific Third Party Products Drivers and<br />

Patches web site at:<br />

http://www.<strong>ncr</strong>..com/support/support_drivers_patches.asp?Class=retail_TPP.<br />

• Retail Customer Information Display User’s Guide (BD20‐1431‐B) on<br />

the NCR Information Products web site at:<br />

http://www.info.<strong>ncr</strong>.com/eHome.cfm<br />

Board BIOS<br />

Processor boards use a Phoenix BIOS, which is stored in Flash ROM<br />

and easily upgraded through the network connection or serial port.<br />

The Flash EEPROM also contains the Setup utility, Power‐On Self Tests<br />

(POST), and APM 1.2 (<strong>7401</strong>‐45xx) or ACPI 2.0 (<strong>7401</strong>‐46xx). The boards<br />

also supports system BIOS shadowing, permitting the BIOS to execute<br />

from onboard write‐protected DRAM.<br />

The BIOS displays a sign‐on message during POST identifying the type<br />

of BIOS and a four‐digit revision code.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-19<br />

FLASH memory Implementation<br />

The Intel E28F800B5‐T70 Flash component is organized onboard as<br />

1024 k x 8 (1 MB). While a typical PC BIOS image including video and<br />

LAN boot ROM code normally fits in 256 kB on the Pentium board and<br />

512 kB on the Pentium III/Celeron board, the boards support a 1 MB<br />

flash ROM. The current Phoenix BIOS release only requires 256 kB of<br />

this 1 MB total. The Flash device contains the PC System BIOS along<br />

with the Video BIOS and LAN boot ROM which compresses the ROM<br />

images into a single binary image.<br />

The Flash device is divided into four areas, as described below.<br />

System Address<br />

FLASH Memory Area<br />

F0000H FFFFFH 64 kB Main BIOS<br />

EE000H EFFFFH 8 kB System BIOS Reserved during boot<br />

ED000H EDFFFH 4 kB Plug and Play ESCD Storage Area<br />

E0000H ECFFFH 52 kB System/VGA BIOS Reserved during boot<br />

BIOS Upgrades<br />

Flash memory makes distributing BIOS upgrades easy. A new version<br />

of the BIOS can be installed from the hard disk, network or through a<br />

serial port.<br />

The disk‐based Flash upgrade utilities, Phlash.exe and WinPhlash.exe,<br />

ensure the upgrade BIOS extension matches the target system to<br />

prevent accidentally installing a BIOS for a different type of system.


2-20 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Setup Utility<br />

The ROM‐based Setup utility allows the system configuration to be<br />

modified without opening the system for most basic changes. The<br />

Setup utility is accessible only during the Power‐On Self Test (POST)<br />

by pressing the key after the POST memory test has begun and<br />

before boot begins. A prompt may be enabled that informs users to<br />

press the key to access Setup.<br />

An external alphanumeric keyboard is recommended for running the<br />

BIOS CMOS Setup Utility. Otherwise, a Touch Screen can be used.<br />

Plug and Play<br />

The Processor BIOS also has a setup option to support the Windows<br />

runtime plug and play utilities. When this option is selected, only<br />

devices critical to boot are assigned resources by the BIOS. Device<br />

Node information is available for all devices to ensure compatibility<br />

with Windows 95. System configuration information is stored in ESCD<br />

format. The ESCD data will be cleared upon loss of the CMOS voltage.<br />

Advanced Power Management<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐45xx processor BIOS has support for 1.2 Advanced Power<br />

Management (APM). The version of APM drivers loaded in the<br />

operating system by the user will determine to which specification the<br />

BIOS will adhere. In either case, the energy saving Standby mode can<br />

be initiated by a time‐out period set by the user.<br />

When in Stand By mode, the Processor Board reduces power<br />

consumption by utilizing the processor System Management Mode<br />

(SMM) capabilities and also spinning down hard drives and turning off<br />

VESA DPMS compliant monitors. During setup, the user may select<br />

which DPMS mode (Stand By, Suspend, Auto, or Off) is sent to the<br />

monitor.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-21<br />

The ability to respond to external interrupts is fully maintained while<br />

in Stand By mode allowing the system to service requests such as incoming<br />

data or network messages while unattended. The user may<br />

also make any keyboard or mouse activity to take the system out of the<br />

energy saving Stand By mode. When this occurs, the monitor and IDE<br />

drives are turned back on immediately.<br />

Advanced Power Management (APM) is achieved by the following:<br />

• DOS requires a driver (FS‐APM.dos)<br />

• NT requires a driver (NCRSYSM.SYS)<br />

• Windows 2000 must enable the operating system APM setting. The<br />

OS APM setting is disabled by default. NCR Gold Drivers are<br />

enabled in this setting by selecting:<br />

Start, Control Panel, Power Options, APM tab and check the box<br />

Enable Advance Power Management Support<br />

Click Ok to finish.<br />

ACPI<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐46xx terminal BIOS supports Advance Configuration Power<br />

Interface (ACPI) 2.0 power management. Primary differences between<br />

APM and ACPI are as follows:<br />

• On an APM‐ managed terminal, the BIOS determines when to<br />

switch between power states and also performs the switch. When<br />

using ACPI, the operating system determines when to switch and<br />

informs the BIOS to perform the switch.<br />

• APM must be enabled in the BIOS. ACPI is automatically active<br />

with the operating system.<br />

• ACPI Setup options are available in the OS Control Panel.<br />

Refer to the table in the ACPI section of “Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>‐2xxx and 3xxx<br />

Product Overview” for a comparison of the operation modes (states)<br />

supported by APM and ACPI power management.


2-22 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Operator Display<br />

19889d<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx has a 15‐inch TFT (thin film transistor) 1024x760 with 65<br />

K colors display.<br />

LCD Adapter Board<br />

The signals from the LCD header on the Processor Board are brought<br />

to the LCD on a harness. Since there are multiple pin configurations<br />

and connector types being used on the LCD, a small adapter board is<br />

used to receive the LCD harness and map the signals into the correct<br />

pin‐out for the LCD panel. This board has a connector that plugs<br />

directly into the LCD panel.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-23<br />

LCD Backlight Inverter Module<br />

An Inverter Board supplies power for the LCD Backlight, which is a<br />

separate module in the terminal. The inverter has a connector that<br />

receives power, ground, and a Backlight dimming signal from the<br />

Processor Board. The inverter generates the high voltage necessary to<br />

start and run dual CCFL (cold‐cathode fluorescent lamps) Backlights.<br />

A fuse located on the Inverter Board protects power to the inverter.<br />

This fuse protects the system from damage in the event of a Backlight<br />

or Inverter Board fault. The fuse is not field replaceable; if it blows, the<br />

safety characteristics of one or more components on the Inverter Board<br />

may have been compromised and the Inverter Board should be<br />

replaced.<br />

If one or both Backlight tubes become disconnected or otherwise opencircuited,<br />

protection circuitry shuts down the inverter. This avoids<br />

over‐powering a single tube and also protects against high voltage<br />

shorting.<br />

The Backlight tubes for the Active displays (TFT) can be replaced.<br />

Touch Screen<br />

The Touch Screen completely covers the LCD and is mounted directly<br />

in front of the LCD, behind the front plastic bezel of the terminal. The<br />

touch controller on the Processor Board supports capacitive and<br />

resistive touch glass.<br />

The touch glass has an integrated harness that is routed into the<br />

Processor Board enclosure and is connected to a header on the<br />

Processor Board.<br />

The touch glass has a glare‐reducing texture that also helps hide<br />

fingerprints.


2-24 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Features<br />

Integrated Speakers<br />

LCD<br />

Touchscreen<br />

MSR<br />

Keylock<br />

Keyboard<br />

Motorized<br />

Card Reader<br />

Trackball<br />

Secure Cabinet with Integrated Speakers<br />

Pin Pad<br />

19889a<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx cabinet has an anti‐vandal keylock that secures the<br />

cabinet in a closed position. The cabinet has no exposed screws,<br />

however, the rear of the cabinet is designed to accept brackets for<br />

signage and branding. Supervisory and service personnel can unlock<br />

the cabinet to replace the paper roll or perform maintenance on the<br />

terminal. Integrated stereo speakers are included in the top of the <strong>7401</strong>‐<br />

4xxx Bezel that surrounds the LCD Touch Screen module.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-25<br />

Ruggedized Keyboard with Trackball<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal has an anti‐vandal, spill resistant keyboard<br />

with trackball. The keyboard cover and keys, and the trackball are<br />

constructed of heavy duty, non‐destructive metal to withstand the<br />

extra use that occurs in unattended environments. U.S. and U.K.<br />

keyboard layouts are available as features. Other country‐specific<br />

keyboard layouts are available as kits. The Keyboard and Trackball are<br />

mounted in a keyboard tray that slides forward when the cabinet is<br />

open to permit easier access to the inside of the terminal for service<br />

personnel.<br />

For <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminals with a U.K. keyboard (F130, F131, or F132),<br />

changes are required to the Regional Settings in the Control Panel.<br />

Refer to Chapter 4 for details.<br />

Pin Pad<br />

A secure anti‐vandal pin pad, constructed of non‐destructive metal is<br />

available as a feature. The Pin Pad with 10 numeric and 6 function keys<br />

is integrated into the keyboard tray next to the keyboard and trackball.<br />

The Pin Pad has a 64 KB memory for application use and 64 KB for<br />

data storage. It has programmable protocols and speeds (1200‐19200<br />

bps). When the personal identification number (PIN) is entered, the Pin<br />

Pad combines the PIN with the card data, e<strong>ncr</strong>ypts this information,<br />

and sends it to the host for verification. This device has a serial<br />

interface and is powered by a COM Port C. The Port C Powered Port<br />

option must be set in the BIOS. The Pin Pad is pre‐configured for<br />

e<strong>ncr</strong>yption by an authorized e<strong>ncr</strong>yption facility before it is integrated<br />

into the keyboard. OPOS support is not available with the Pin Pad


2-26 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Motorized Card Reader<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader<br />

An optional Motorized Card Reader is available to provide MSR cardreading<br />

functionality similar to an ATM. When inserted, the card is fed<br />

into the reader and is retained there until the transaction is complete.<br />

The Motorized Card Reader has on‐board intelligence to process<br />

Magstripe Cards, Smart Cards, and Memory Cards:<br />

• Supports bi‐directional read of magnetic stripe data (3‐track)<br />

• Reads and writes all ISO 7816 T=0, T=1 micro‐processor Smart<br />

Cards<br />

• Accepts cards with CP8 and ISO positions<br />

• The card reader uses a vendor‐provided Windows Driver. OPOS<br />

support is not available with the motorized card reader.<br />

• This device is powered by a 12 VDC power supply.<br />

A single 3‐track analog MSR is available as a feature, supporting ISO<br />

format cards. When the MSR is not desired, a filler piece for the MSR<br />

section is included to make the unit appears uniform.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-27<br />

Full Page Printer<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx has a full page thermal sheet printer that provides high<br />

resolution 300 dpi (11.81 dots per mm) printing with a loop presenter<br />

and cutter.<br />

Paper Roll<br />

Printhead<br />

Lever<br />

Paper<br />

Presenter<br />

19798e<br />

• The printer uses a large 6 in. diameter paper roll (650 ft. at 3.2 Mil<br />

thickness) with selectable paper widths from 165 mm to 216 mm<br />

(6.5 in. to 8.5 in.).<br />

• A Registration Mark sensor is supported for setting paper lengths.<br />

• Printer sensors provide alerts for paper out, paper low, paper in<br />

presenter, Printhead temperature, Printhead level position, and<br />

paper jam.<br />

• The Printer uses a vendor‐provided Windows Driver. OPOS<br />

support is not available with the full page printer.<br />

• This device is powered by a 24 VDC power supply.


2-28 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Other Integrated Devices and Indicators<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d Disk Drive<br />

A 2.5‐inch IDE hard disk is available to support Windows NT. The<br />

drive is the standard type that is used by notebook PCs.<br />

Integrated CD-ROM<br />

An integrated CD‐ROM is mounted to the back of the core module<br />

behind the LCD Touch Screen inside the cabinet. The CD‐ROM is used<br />

to install terminal software and can be used for other functions<br />

requiring a CD‐ROM.<br />

Reset Switch<br />

As a last resort, the Reset Switch can be used to reboot the system if the<br />

software reset port mechanisms fail. The switch is on the connector<br />

row at the bottom of the enclosure. Intentionally, it is not easily<br />

accessible, but can be operated without removing covers or using<br />

special tools.<br />

Reset Switch<br />

19901a<br />

Except when testing software in a lab environment, always disconnect<br />

the AC power cord.<br />

Reset Procedure<br />

1. Gently press the Reset Switch and hold it in for at least four<br />

seconds. The screen goes blank.<br />

2. Release the Reset Switch and then gently press it again. The system<br />

reboots.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-29<br />

Compact Flash<br />

The 256MB compact flash can be used in a Windows XP embedded<br />

environment. When using the Windows XP embedded OS, an<br />

additional 128MB SDRAM SODIMM is required to support the<br />

necessary virtual memory requirements. The 256MB compact flash<br />

replaces the hard drive in the unit.<br />

Internal Speaker<br />

The Internal Speaker is connected to the PC speaker output of the<br />

system chipset, not to the audio subsystem. It is connected to the<br />

Processor Board via a harness and mounted inside the Processor Board<br />

enclosure.<br />

POS Connector Board<br />

The POS Connector Board is a small daughter board that mounts<br />

directly on the Cash Drawer and Parallel Port header. Connectors on<br />

the edge of this board form a second connector row above the<br />

Processor Board connectors. Connectors are available for two cash<br />

drawers, a customer display and a microphone.<br />

Power for the cash drawers (24 V) and VFD customer display (5 V and<br />

12 V) is supplied by the Enhanced Power Supply through the parallel<br />

connector.<br />

USB Camera<br />

The integrated USB Camera (available as a kit) supports the capture of<br />

a video image of individuals operating the EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong>‐46xx<br />

terminal.


2-30 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

Motion Sensor<br />

The terminal hardware can detect movement near the terminal and<br />

enables software to prompt system operation from a low‐power state.<br />

Application software may also be able to make use of motion detection<br />

when in the ON state if it is enabled by lower‐level software.<br />

USB<br />

Camera<br />

IRDA<br />

Motion Sensor<br />

Power/Status LED<br />

Motion is detected as a change in ambient light level that is greater<br />

than a software‐controlled threshold.<br />

A photodiode mounted behind the front bezel of the unit senses<br />

ambient light levels. The photodiode resides on a small circuit board<br />

(the Motion Sensor Board). A harness connects the Motion Sensor<br />

Board to the amplifier and motion sensing logic on the Processor<br />

Board. The user Power/Status LED indicator shares this board.<br />

19889f<br />

Power/Status LED<br />

The LED power indicator indicates that power is present. The LED is<br />

green when the processor and BIOS are operating properly. The LED is<br />

mounted behind the front bezel on the same board as the motion<br />

sensor.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-31<br />

Power OK LED<br />

The Power OK LED is located behind the Cable Cover, between the<br />

Customer Display and Cash Drawer connectors.<br />

Power OK<br />

(5V and 24 V)<br />

19901d<br />

LAN Status LEDs<br />

LAN Integrity<br />

(Green)<br />

LAN Speed<br />

Yellow = 100 MB<br />

OFF = 10 MB<br />

19901c<br />

Power Supply<br />

The terminal uses an AC adapter for its power supply, mounted inside<br />

the cabinet. The supply is inaccessible when the terminal is in the<br />

normal operation with the cabinet closed. The mounting position to<br />

prevent tampering, and sealed to help protect against spills or other<br />

environmental hazards.<br />

Note: The power supply automatically senses the proper AC voltage;<br />

therefore only normal servicing access is required.


2-32 Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview<br />

All power required to operate the base unit, PCMCIA option and<br />

PCMCIA cards, speaker option, scanner option, and bus‐powered USB<br />

peripherals is provided by the power supply.<br />

The Processor Board serves as the hub to distribute power to all<br />

terminal functions. Cash drawers, VFD customer display, PS/2<br />

keyboard, PCMCIA daughter board and slots, scanner (through RS‐232<br />

port), USB, hard disk, and the LCD all receive power through their<br />

respective Processor Board connectors.<br />

Motorized Card Reader Power Supply<br />

The Motorized Card Reader uses an AC adapter for its power supply,<br />

mounted on the inside of the cabinet.<br />

Full Page Printer Power Supply<br />

The Full Page Printer uses an AC adapter for its power supply,<br />

mounted inside the cabinet under the printer.<br />

Integrated Speakers<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx includes two stereo speakers in the top of the Bezel<br />

above the LCD Touch Screen. The maximum output of the speakers is<br />

approximately 6 watts per channel.


Chapter 2: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx Product Overview 2-33<br />

EasyPoint 45 Pedestal<br />

A cone‐shaped, basic pedestal for the <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal. The pedestal<br />

is black and is metal and wood construction. The base of the pedestal<br />

has the following features:<br />

• Mounting holes to secure the unit to the floor<br />

• Adjustable feet<br />

• Cable access door<br />

• Space for an NCR 4055 UPS<br />

• Cable routing hole and channel<br />

20047a


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Introduction<br />

Installation Summary<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐2xxx and 3xxx terminals are fully assembled at the factory.<br />

This chapter explains the mounting options and how to connect<br />

optional hardware components to these terminals.<br />

The terminal should be removed from the shipping packaging and<br />

visual checks made to verify the correct hardware configuration. The<br />

system is then configured and any communication cables are<br />

connected.<br />

Only after inspection should the power cord be attached to the system<br />

and then connected to the AC power source. Power‐up self‐tests will<br />

run to verify basic functionality.<br />

ROM‐based setup should be used to configure network options. Full<br />

configuration depends upon the system server and the management<br />

web site.


3-2 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installation Restrictions<br />

• Before installing the terminal, read and follow the guidelines in the<br />

NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> Site Preparation Guide and the NCR<br />

Workstation and Peripheral AC Wiring Guide.<br />

• Install the terminal near an electrical outlet that is easily accessible.<br />

Use the power cord as a power‐disconnect device.<br />

• Do not permit any object to rest on the power cord. Do not locate<br />

the terminal where the power cord can be walked on.<br />

• Use a grounding strap or touch a grounded metal object to<br />

discharge any static electricity from your body before servicing the<br />

terminal.<br />

• If the power cord is replaced, it must be replaced with the same<br />

type of cord with the protective shroud.<br />

• Do not route the power cord through openings with sharp edges.<br />

Caution: This unit contains hazardous voltages and should only be<br />

serviced by qualified service personnel.<br />

Caution: DO NOT connect or disconnect the transaction printer while<br />

the terminal is connected to AC power. This can result in system or<br />

printer damage.<br />

Warning: The <strong>7401</strong> must be mounted securely to prevent a hazard. It<br />

must be installed in accordance with local building codes. The post<br />

or wall on which the unit is mounted should be able to withstand<br />

four times the weight of the unit, which is approximately 20 lbs.<br />

(9 kg).


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-3<br />

Connecting the Cables<br />

Fixed-Angle Mount (F504)<br />

The cable connectors are located behind the Core Module. The<br />

procedure for accessing the connectors is different for Fixed‐Angle<br />

Mounts and Tilt Mounts.<br />

1. Remove the screws that secure the Core Module to the Fixed‐Angle<br />

Mount.<br />

Core Module<br />

Fixed Angle Mount<br />

Remove Screws<br />

(One on each side)<br />

17339


3-4 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

2. Raise the bottom of the Core Module, pull out the Core Module<br />

Support and rest the Core Module on the Core Module Support.<br />

Core Module<br />

Metal Locking<br />

Tabs<br />

Keyboard Port<br />

Core Module<br />

Support<br />

3. Route the cables as described in the following section, Cable<br />

Routing.<br />

17340


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-5<br />

Fixed-Angle Mount (F503)<br />

1. Remove the screw that secures the Core Module to the Fixed‐Angle<br />

Mount.<br />

Core Module<br />

Remove Screws<br />

(one on each side)<br />

Pedestal Mount<br />

16396


3-6 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

2. Remove the Core Module from the Fixed‐Angle Mount.<br />

16397<br />

3. Route the cables as described in the following section, Cable<br />

Routing.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-7<br />

Cable Routing<br />

The cables can be routed either out the bottom or rear of the Fixed‐<br />

Angle Mount. The Power Cord is shipped from the factory routed<br />

through the bottom exit hole in the Fixed‐Angle Mount. To route the<br />

cables out the rear exit, you must move the grommet from the bottom<br />

exit to the rear exit hole.<br />

Since these openings have different shapes, you must trim the<br />

grommet to length.<br />

1. Remove the grommet from the bottom exit hole.<br />

Grommet<br />

Rear Exit<br />

Bottom Exit<br />

16481


3-8 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

2. Press the grommet along the bottom edge of the rear exit and cut it<br />

to length.<br />

Measure<br />

and Cut<br />

16482<br />

3. Install the remainder of the grommet to the other three sides of the<br />

opening.<br />

Trim the<br />

Excess<br />

16483<br />

4. Trim the excess length.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-9<br />

Cable Connector Identification<br />

The cable connectors are located on the back of the Core Module.<br />

CRT<br />

LAN<br />

S-Video<br />

USB 1<br />

USB 2<br />

COM 1<br />

Keyboard<br />

PS/2<br />

COM 2<br />

Power<br />

Microphone<br />

(optional)<br />

RS-232<br />

(COM 3 & 4)<br />

Parallel<br />

Speaker<br />

Audio Out<br />

Cash Drawer<br />

IRDA<br />

18011<br />

Note: COM1 and COM3 can be powered ports. They are enabled in<br />

the BIOS.<br />

Note: The COM3 & COM4 RS‐232 ports require the Dual RS‐232 Port<br />

Kit (7454‐F072) feature<br />

After connecting the cables, reassemble the terminal.


3-10 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Tilt Mount<br />

Tilt Mount cable connectors are located on the underside of the Core<br />

Module, under a cable cover.<br />

1. Tilt the display to access the cable connectors.<br />

Cable Cover<br />

Thumb Screw<br />

15968<br />

2. Loosen the thumbscrew that secures the Cable Cover and remove<br />

the cover.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-11<br />

Cable Routing<br />

The Tilt Mount has three places to secure cables to the base of the unit<br />

by using a cable tie wrap. Remove the power supply cover or customer<br />

display from the base of the unit, two thumb screws on bottom rear,<br />

and use a tie wrap to secure the Ethernet cable to one of the provided<br />

molded cable tie holders on the base. This should provide sufficient<br />

strain relief to prevent the cable from becoming tight and damaging the<br />

connector on the Processor Board.<br />

The peripheral cables are routed down through the Mount Assembly<br />

and out the rear of the unit.<br />

Bottom View<br />

16413a


3-12 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Cable Connector Identification<br />

1. Connect the peripheral and LAN cables. The illustration below can<br />

be used to identify the connectors on the terminal. See the sections<br />

that follow for specific installation instructions for each of the<br />

peripherals.<br />

Audio Out<br />

Speaker<br />

CRT<br />

LAN<br />

S-Video<br />

USB 1<br />

USB 2<br />

COM 1<br />

RS-232<br />

(COM 3 & 4)<br />

Keyboard<br />

PS/2<br />

COM 2<br />

Parallel<br />

Power<br />

IRDA<br />

Microphone<br />

(optional)<br />

Cash Drawer<br />

Note: COM1 and COM3 can be powered ports. They are enabled in<br />

the BIOS.<br />

18010<br />

Note: The COM3 & COM4 RS‐232 ports require the Dual RS‐232 Port<br />

Kit (7454‐F072) feature<br />

2. After installing the peripheral and LAN cables replace the cable<br />

cover and re‐tighten the thumbscrew.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-13<br />

Installing Peripherals<br />

This section describes how to install transaction printers and other<br />

peripherals on the <strong>7401</strong>‐2xxx and 3xxx terminals.<br />

Installing a Transaction Printer<br />

The following printers can connect through a non‐powered RS‐232 or<br />

USB connector. They all require an external power supply. The<br />

illustrations show how to connect to the 7194 printer. Connecting to the<br />

other three printers is done in the same manner. Refer to the<br />

corresponding printer owner’s guide for illustrations of the connector<br />

locations.<br />

• 7158<br />

• 7167<br />

• 7194<br />

• 7197<br />

RS-232 Installation<br />

1. Connect the Printer Interface Cable to the RS‐232 Connector on the<br />

back or on the bottom of the printer.<br />

Cash Drawer Connector<br />

Power Connector<br />

RS-232 Connector<br />

16632a


3-14 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

2. Connect the other end of the printer cable to one of the RS‐232<br />

(non‐powered) ports on the terminal.<br />

3. Connect the external power supply cable to the Power Connector<br />

on the printer.<br />

4. Plug the external power supply AC cable into an AC outlet.<br />

USB Installation<br />

1. Connect the Printer Interface Cable to the USB Connector on the<br />

back or on the bottom of the printer.<br />

USB Connector<br />

Cash Drawer Connector<br />

Power Connector<br />

2. Connect the other end of the printer cable to one of the USB<br />

connectors (USB 1 or USB 2) on the terminal.<br />

16632b<br />

3. Connect the external power supply cable to the Power Connector on<br />

the printer.<br />

4. Plug the external power supply AC cable into an AC outlet.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-15<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-K590 Self-Service Printer<br />

For information about installing the K590 self‐service printer, refer to<br />

the NCR <strong>7401</strong>‐K590 Self‐Service Printer Owner’s Guide (B005‐0000‐1346).<br />

18012


3-16 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installing a Cash Drawer<br />

1. Place the cash drawer in the desired location, within cable length of<br />

the terminal.<br />

2. Connect the cash drawer cable to the terminal cash drawer<br />

connector.<br />

16269<br />

Cash Drawer<br />

15969c<br />

Note: The Cash Drawer can optionally be connected to the printer.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-17<br />

Installing a Second Cash Drawer<br />

The terminal supports a 2‐drawer configuration with a Y‐cable<br />

(1416‐C372‐0006).<br />

1. Place the cash drawer in the desired location, within cableʹs length<br />

of the terminal.<br />

2. Connect the Y‐cable to the terminal cash drawer connector.<br />

Dual Cash Drawer Y-Cable<br />

1416-C372-0006<br />

Note: The Y‐cable can optionally be connected to the printer.<br />

16270


3-18 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installing PC Cards<br />

PC cards (wireless, modem, and so forth) can be installed on any<br />

terminal with the Dual PCMCIA Port (<strong>7401</strong>‐K060).<br />

Only terminals with a Fixed‐Angle Mount require the removal of the<br />

Core Module from the mount to install a PC card. If you do not have a<br />

Fixed‐Angle Mount terminal, skip to Step 3.<br />

1. Remove the screws that secure the Core Module to the Fixed‐Angle<br />

Mount.<br />

Core Module<br />

Remove Screws<br />

(one on each side)<br />

Pedestal Mount<br />

16396


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-19<br />

2. Remove the Core Module from the Fixed‐Angle Mount.<br />

16397


3-20 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

3. Remove the Wireless Antenna Cover.<br />

Wireless Antenna Cover<br />

Screws (2)<br />

Fixed-Angle Mount Model<br />

Wireless Antenna Cover<br />

Screws (2)<br />

Tilt Mount Model<br />

18615<br />

4. Insert the PC card (wireless card, modem, and so forth).


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-21<br />

Mounting a Fixed-Angle Mount Terminal<br />

A terminal attached to a Fixed‐Angle Mount can be installed on a:<br />

• Pedestal (or on the edge of a flat horizontal surface)<br />

• Wall<br />

• Pole<br />

Pedestal Mount<br />

Pole Mount<br />

Wall Mount<br />

16414<br />

The sections that follow describe how to perform these installations.<br />

For installation instructions of feature kits not described in this section,<br />

refer to the Feature Kits appendix.


3-22 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-K522 Pedestal Mount<br />

To install the Fixed‐Angle Mount on a pedestal or the edge of flat<br />

horizontal surface, use the K522 Table Mount Bracket Kit.<br />

Flat Horizontal Surface<br />

K-522 Mounting Plate<br />

Securing Screw<br />

1. Secure the Mounting Plate to the flat horizontal surface of choice.<br />

Position the plate to permit the scanner module to hang over the<br />

edge of the surface.<br />

16363


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-23<br />

2. The cables for the <strong>7401</strong> can be routed through an opening in the<br />

back of the Fixed‐Angle Mount, or you can remove the plastic<br />

knockout in the bottom of the mount to permit routing the cables<br />

down through the flat surface. If you are routing cables out the<br />

bottom, drill a hole in the flat surface aligned with the rectangular<br />

opening in the Mounting Plate.<br />

3. Install the <strong>7401</strong> to the Mounting Plate. The slots on the bottom of<br />

the Fixed‐Angle Mount mate to locking tabs on the Mounting Plate.<br />

4. Install the Securing Screw.


3-24 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-K521 Wall Mount<br />

To install the Fixed‐Angle Mount on a wall, use the K521 Wall Mount<br />

Bracket Kit.<br />

1. Secure the Wall Bracket to the wall with lag screws into the studs,<br />

or with hardware of similar strength. The recommended viewing<br />

height for the terminal is 1.2 m (48 in.) from the floor.<br />

1.2 m (48 in)<br />

Recommended<br />

Height from Floor<br />

Lag Screws (4)<br />

K521 Wall Bracket<br />

16415


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-25<br />

2. Install the slots on back of the Fixed‐Angle Mount onto the locking<br />

tabs of the Wall Bracket.<br />

16416


3-26 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-K521 Wall Mount with <strong>7401</strong>-K530 Pole Brackets<br />

To install the Fixed‐Angle Mount on a pole, use the K520 Post Mount<br />

Bracket Kit (same as K521 but includes strap kit).<br />

1.2 m (48 in)<br />

Recommended<br />

Height from Floor<br />

K521<br />

K530<br />

16392a<br />

1. Cut two metal straps to length (pole circumference plus 2 inches).


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-27<br />

2. Loop one end of the metal strap through the slot on the clamp.<br />

Loop strap through slot<br />

3. Insert the end of the clamp into the slot on the Wall Bracket as<br />

shown below.<br />

16417<br />

Locking Tabs<br />

(facing away from pole<br />

and pointing up)<br />

Wall Bracket<br />

Route clamp<br />

through opening<br />

nearest to pole<br />

Insert clamp into slot<br />

18009<br />

Note: There are two openings that the clamp can be routed<br />

through. Use the larger opening for round poles (nearest the pole).<br />

Use the narrow slot for square/rectangular poles.


3-28 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

4. Insert the metal strap through the opening on the opposite side of<br />

the Wall Bracket.<br />

Route the strap<br />

through the slot<br />

16405


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-29<br />

5. Wrap the metal strap around the pole and loop it through the other<br />

end of the clamp.<br />

16406<br />

6. Snug the clamp and then crimp the metal strap with a pair of pliers.<br />

16409


3-30 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

7. Using a 5/16‐nut driver, tighten the clamp.<br />

Caution: Do not over‐tighten the clamps.<br />

16407<br />

8. Repeat the previous steps for the second clamp.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-31<br />

9. Install the slots on back of the Fixed‐Angle Mount onto the locking<br />

tabs of the Wall Bracket.<br />

1.2 m (48 in)<br />

Recommended<br />

Height from Floor<br />

16392


3-32 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

10. For a pole mount installation, route the cables through the Wall<br />

Bracket as shown below.<br />

16408


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-33<br />

Installing a K501 Tilt Mount Terminal<br />

A Tilt‐Mount terminal can be installed on a flat horizontal surface or a<br />

flat vertical surface.<br />

NCR<br />

Table-Top Mount<br />

Wall Mount<br />

16429


3-34 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-K533 Wall Mount<br />

To install the Tilt Mount on a flat vertical surface, use the K533 Wall<br />

Mount Bracket Kit.<br />

1. Secure the Wall Plate to the wall with lag screws (4) into the studs<br />

or with hardware of similar strength. The recommended viewing<br />

height for the terminal is 1.2 m (48 in.) from the floor.<br />

F501/K501<br />

K533 Wall Mount<br />

Adapter Plate<br />

Release Lever<br />

Wall Plate<br />

16400a<br />

2. Install the Wall Mount Adapter Plate to the bottom of the terminal<br />

with screws (4).<br />

3. Install the terminal to the Wall Plate. The bottom of the Wall Mount<br />

Adapter Plate has slots that mate to locking tabs on the Wall Plate.<br />

4. Latch the Release Lever.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-35<br />

Wall Mounting a <strong>7401</strong>-K502 Core Module<br />

To flush mount the Core Module on a flat vertical surface, use the F502<br />

Flush Mount Bracket Kit.<br />

Flush Mount w/Power Supply<br />

Mounted on the Outside Wall<br />

Flush Mount w/Power Supply<br />

Mounted on the Inside Wall<br />

16683


3-36 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

1. Secure the Wall Plate to the wall with lag screws (4) into the studs<br />

or with hardware of similar strength. The recommended viewing<br />

height for the terminal is 1.2 m (48 in.) from the floor to the center<br />

of the screen.<br />

Note: Drill a hole in the wall for the cables if you are mounting the<br />

power supply on the opposite side of the wall.<br />

Flush Mounting Bracket<br />

Wall Plate<br />

Cable Routing<br />

Cable Routing<br />

(through wall)<br />

16684<br />

2. Mount the Power Supply to the wall with screws (4).<br />

3. Route all cables through the brackets and connect them to the<br />

terminal.<br />

4. Install the Flush Mounting Bracket to the back of the terminal with<br />

screws (4).<br />

5. Install the terminal to the Wall Plate. The bottom of the Flush<br />

Mounting Bracket has slots that mate to locking tabs on the Wall<br />

Plate. Secure the unit with the screw.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-37<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-9212 LCD No-Cabinet (12.1-inch)<br />

The 12.1‐inch LCD No‐Cabinet model is purchased by customers who<br />

design their own enclosures to meet their specific needs. This section<br />

provides information that must be considered when designing<br />

enclosures.<br />

Front View<br />

18577<br />

Back View<br />

Motion Sensor<br />

18743


3-38 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installation Guidelines<br />

• To prevent moisture from entering system, the front of the display<br />

must be in close contact with the opening in the enclosure.<br />

• Within every custom enclosure, the Electronics Box Back Cover<br />

MUST remain installed because it helps dissipate the heat<br />

generated by the CPU.<br />

• Adequate ventilation must be provided in every custom enclosure.<br />

The maximum allowable ambient temperature within any<br />

enclosure is 45 o C (113 o F).<br />

• To prevent accidental shorts, the power supply and any other<br />

peripherals within the enclosure must be mounted securely and<br />

within reach of the display’s connectors.<br />

• This model comes with a motion sensor that is at the end of a<br />

381 mm (15 in.) cable. When using the motion sensor, it must be<br />

mounted between 25 and 76 mm (1 to 3 in.) below the bottom of the<br />

display and centered along the width of the display. (F753 [AT&T]<br />

includes a front enclosure in which the motion sensor is already<br />

mounted.)<br />

• Compliance of this device with regulatory requirements must be<br />

verified in the end‐use application.<br />

• This device is a component which requires a suitable enclosure in<br />

its end‐use application. The end‐use product in which this<br />

component is used should be certified in accordance with UL 1950,<br />

EN60950, IEC950 or other applicable safety standard.<br />

NCR displays are not designed for horizontal or inverted use. NCR<br />

displays must be mounted no more than 40 o forward or backward from<br />

horizontal. Failure to follow this guideline could result in overheating.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-39<br />

Mounting Specification Illustrations<br />

16 mm<br />

(.63 in.)<br />

12.59 mm<br />

(.496 in.)<br />

218.44 mm<br />

(8.6 in.)<br />

299.72 mm<br />

(11.8 in.)<br />

Front surface of display bezel must<br />

protrude through enclosure to provide<br />

secure and watertight fit.<br />

NCR enclosure fronts<br />

typically use a dimension of<br />

302.26 mm (11.9 in.) +/-.254 mm (.01 in.) by<br />

221.23 mm (8.71 in.) +/-.254 mm (.01 in.) with<br />

radiuses in the corners of 2.54 mm (.1in.).<br />

Use four #8-32 machine screws<br />

to mount display into enclosure.<br />

264.16 mm<br />

(10.4 in.)<br />

327.15 mm<br />

(12.88 in.)<br />

18576


3-40 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-9512 LCD No-Cabinet (15-inch)<br />

Installation Guidelines<br />

The 15‐inch LCD No‐Cabinet model is purchased by customers who<br />

design their own enclosures to meet their specific needs. This section<br />

provides information that must be considered when designing<br />

enclosures.<br />

• To prevent moisture from entering system, the front of the display<br />

must be in close contact with the opening in the enclosure.<br />

• Within every custom enclosure, the Electronics Box Back Cover<br />

MUST remain installed because it helps dissipate the heat<br />

generated by the CPU.<br />

• Adequate ventilation must be provided in every custom enclosure.<br />

The maximum allowable ambient temperature within any<br />

enclosure is 45 o C (113 o F).<br />

• To prevent accidental shorts, the power supply and any other<br />

peripherals within the enclosure must be mounted securely and<br />

within reach of the display’s connectors.<br />

• This model comes with a motion sensor that is at the end of a<br />

381 mm (15 in.) cable. When using the motion sensor, it must be<br />

mounted between 25 and 76 mm (1 to 3 in.) below the bottom of the<br />

display and centered along the width of the display.<br />

• Compliance of this device with regulatory requirements must be<br />

verified in the end‐use application.<br />

• This device is a component which requires a suitable enclosure in<br />

its end‐use application. The end‐use product in which this<br />

component is used should be certified in accordance with UL 1950,<br />

EN60950, IEC950 or other applicable safety standard.<br />

NCR displays are not designed for horizontal or inverted use. NCR<br />

displays must be mounted no more than 40 o forward or backward from<br />

horizontal. Failure to follow this guideline could result in overheating.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-41<br />

Mounting Specification Illustrations<br />

The following illustration shows the minimum allowable dimensions<br />

for the display opening when the optional cosmetic bezel is used.<br />

OPTIONAL COSMETIC BEZEL<br />

GASKET MUST MEET INSIDE SURFACE<br />

OF CUSTOM DISPLAY OPENING.<br />

(OPTIONAL COSMETIC GASKET NOT USED<br />

IF OPTIONAL BEZEL IS NOT USED).<br />

348.7 mm<br />

3.730 in. 4.2 mm<br />

.165 in.<br />

9.4 mm<br />

.372 in.<br />

270 mm<br />

10.630 in.<br />

FRONT SURFACE OF DISPLAY BEZEL (IF USED)<br />

MUST PROTRUDE THROUGH ENCLOSURE. GASKET<br />

MUST MEET INSIDE SURFACE OF CUSTOM<br />

APPLICATION'S DISPLAY OPENING. THIS IS<br />

TO PROVIDE A SECURE AND WATERTIGHT FIT.<br />

USE 4 #8-32 MACHINE SCREWS IN<br />

CORNERS OF UNIT TO MOUNT DISPLAY<br />

INTO ENCLOSURE. 8 TOTAL SCREWS<br />

MAY BE USED FOR MULTIPLE MOUNTING<br />

CONFIGURATIONS.<br />

345.4 mm<br />

13.600 in.<br />

156.2 mm<br />

6.150 in.<br />

175 mm<br />

6.888 in.<br />

141.6 mm<br />

5.575 in.<br />

292.4 mm<br />

11.510 in.<br />

22.9 mm<br />

.900 in.<br />

200.7 mm<br />

7.900 in.<br />

17.2 mm<br />

.678 in.<br />

19100


3-42 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

The following illustration shows the maximum allowable dimensions<br />

for the display opening when the optional cosmetic bezel is not used.<br />

Gasket must meet inside surface of custom<br />

application's display opening. This is to provide<br />

a secure and watertight fit.<br />

312.5 mm<br />

12.305 in. 13.7 mm<br />

0.540 in.<br />

27.5 mm<br />

1.083 in.<br />

235.6 mm<br />

9.275 in.<br />

Use four #8-32 machine screws in the<br />

corners of the unit to mount the display<br />

into an enclosure. Six total screws may<br />

be used for multiple mounting configurations.<br />

345.4 mm<br />

13.6 in.<br />

156.2 mm<br />

6.15 in.<br />

175 mm<br />

6.888 in.<br />

141.6 mm<br />

5.575 in.<br />

292.4 mm<br />

11.51 in.<br />

22.9 mm<br />

0.900 in.<br />

200.7 mm<br />

17.2 mm<br />

7.9 in.<br />

0.678 in.<br />

19101


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-43<br />

4055 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)<br />

The NCR 4055 UPS is available in two models for the <strong>7401</strong>:<br />

Item Description Volt/Hz<br />

4055‐1300‐7194 300 VA/180 Watt <strong>Kiosk</strong> UPS 120 Volt/60 Hz<br />

4055‐1500‐7194 500 VA/300 Watt <strong>Kiosk</strong> UPS 120 Volt/60 Hz<br />

Power Mon II® Software (G099‐4551‐0100) is recommended for use<br />

with the 4055 UPS and the <strong>7401</strong>.<br />

19412<br />

Note: On Windows 2000, the Power Mon software may appear to not<br />

fully shut the system down. In such cases you may still see a dim<br />

display. This does not cause the loss of any data.


3-44 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installing the UPS<br />

Refer to the User’s Manual delivered with the NCR 4055 UPS before<br />

installing the UPS for use with the <strong>7401</strong>.<br />

To install the UPS with the <strong>7401</strong> connect the power cable and the LAN<br />

cable from the <strong>7401</strong> to the UPS. Then connect the in‐house LAN cable<br />

to the UPS, and the power cable on the UPS to the AC power outlet.<br />

Note: If you are installing the K580/K590 Self Service Printer or the<br />

Printer Spacer in a Pedestal Mount, the UPS must be installed first. See<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K037 and <strong>7401</strong>‐K052 Feature Kits for more information.<br />

Installing the Power Mon II® Software<br />

The Power Mon II® software is provided on CD‐ROM and may be<br />

installed over a network or using an integrated or parallel CD‐ROM<br />

drive. All operating system versions of the Power Mon software and<br />

installation <strong>doc</strong>umentation are contained on the CD.<br />

The Power Mon installation should auto start. If it doesn’t, browse the<br />

CD for the operating system you are using and run Setup.exe for that<br />

operating system. Follow the prompts to install the software.<br />

Note: When you are prompted for Configuration Code, enter 7 to<br />

identify the interface cable type.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-45<br />

Configuring the Power Mon II® Software<br />

Once Power Mon is installed, configure the software by clicking on the<br />

Power Mon icon. Select “Configure UPS” to configure the UPS<br />

parameters such as voice messages and battery run time.<br />

Note: Battery run time for the 4055 UPS running with a <strong>7401</strong> and a<br />

K580/K590 Self Service Printer at a load of 150 VA is approximately:<br />

Item<br />

Approximate Battery Run Time<br />

300 VA (180 W) 13 minutes*<br />

500 VA (300 W) 23 minutes*<br />

* Times are approximate and may vary due to modified configurations,<br />

environmental conditions, ambient temperature, battery age, and other<br />

factors.<br />

Reference NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong>Site Preparation (B005‐0000‐1255) for<br />

additional power requirements for the <strong>7401</strong>.


3-46 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Finalizing the Installation<br />

After the hardware installation has been completed, the terminal can<br />

be powered up to finalize the installation. The operating system, along<br />

with platform modifications, is pre‐installed. The following sections list<br />

the steps involved to complete the system installation for each of the<br />

Gold Disk operating systems.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win2000)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most<br />

of the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk<br />

image. Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. After the terminal reboots, it will perform a disk check and then<br />

continue with the Windows 2000 installation.<br />

2. Enter the User Name and Organization.<br />

3. Enter the Computer Name for the client.<br />

4. Enter the Administrator’s Account Password (optional)<br />

5. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the client.<br />

6. Login when prompted.<br />

7. Run the MicroTouch screen calibration from the Desktop icon.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinXPe)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most<br />

of the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk<br />

image. Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. Click the Admin button to login as Administrator.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-47<br />

2. Read the EULA (End‐User License Agreement) information in the<br />

DOS window, then type EXIT and press Enter to close the DOS<br />

window.<br />

3. Start the Network Setup Wizard.<br />

4. Select options to identify the network information for the terminal<br />

environment.<br />

5. Enter the Computer Description.<br />

6. Enter the Computer Name.<br />

7. Enter the Workgroup Name.<br />

8. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the terminal.<br />

9. Log in when prompted.<br />

10. Open the Control Panel or use the TouchWare Icon on the desktop<br />

and run the MicroTouch screen calibration.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinNT)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most<br />

of the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk<br />

image. Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. After the terminal reboots, press Next at the Windows Setup screen.<br />

2. Accept the Microsoft license agreement.<br />

3. Enter the User Name and Organization.<br />

4. Enter the Computer Name for the client.<br />

5. Enter the Administrator’s Account Password (optional)<br />

6. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the client.<br />

7. Log in when prompted.<br />

8. Open the Control Panel and run the MicroTouch screen calibration.


3-48 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win98) - (Discontinued)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most<br />

of the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk<br />

image. Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. When the terminal boots it enters the Windows setup routine.<br />

Note: When installing Win98 on terminals with Processor Boards<br />

(<strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx) there are few differences in the procedure as<br />

follows:<br />

a) The terminal starts the Add New <strong>Har</strong>dware Wizard.<br />

b) For each device found, permit Windows to search for new<br />

drivers (take defaults).<br />

c) After each driver is installed you are asked to reboot. Answer<br />

No.<br />

2. At the User Information screen, enter the User information. This<br />

can be done using a keyboard or you can use the touch screen<br />

keyboard. After entering the information, press Enter or touch OK.<br />

3. Go into the Control Panel and set the terminal Date and Time.<br />

4. In the Control Panel, run the MicroTouch screen calibration.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-49<br />

Setting Auto-Logon (WinNT Terminal)<br />

Since the client does not have a keyboard it is desirous to have it logon<br />

automatically.<br />

1. Create a default user account that you want to use to logon to the<br />

client(s).<br />

a) Open the User Manager. Select the Windows Start button,<br />

select Programs, Administrative Tools (Common), and then<br />

Select User Manager.<br />

b) Select the User menu and then select New User. Give the<br />

account a password (mandatory). As an extra precaution set the<br />

password never expires and that the user can not change it.<br />

c) Select Groups to modify the new user’s group memberships.


3-50 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

d) Add the new user to the Administrators group. You need to<br />

do this in order to be able to later turn off the auto‐logon<br />

function.<br />

e) Select OK to close the Group Membership box.<br />

f) Select OK to create the account.<br />

2. Modify the Registry. Select the Windows Start button and select<br />

Run.<br />

3. Enter regedit and then select OK.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-51<br />

4. Open the following registry subkey:<br />

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\WindowsNT\<br />

CurrentVersion\Winlogon<br />

5. Create a new string value to permit auto logon for the default user.<br />

Select the Edit menu, select New and then select String Value.<br />

6. Name the new entry AutoAdminLogon.


3-52 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

7. With the new entry selected, select the Edit menu and then select<br />

Modify. Enter the value 1 for auto‐logon.<br />

A value of 0 sets it to no auto‐logon.<br />

8. Select OK to set the value.<br />

9. Modify the DefaulUserName to contain the user ID that you want to<br />

automatically logon. With the DefaulUserName selected, select the<br />

Edit menu and then select Modify. Enter the user ID.<br />

10. Select OK to set the value.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-53<br />

11. Create a new string value to contain the password for the default<br />

user. Select the Edit menu, select New and then select String Value.<br />

12. Name the new entry DefaultPassword.<br />

13. Edit the string value. With DefaultPassword selected, select the Edit<br />

menu and then select Modify. Enter the value of the password of<br />

the default user (from Step #1). The example below uses password.<br />

14. Select OK to set the value.<br />

This completes the client installation.<br />

To bypass auto logon, and to log on as a different user, hold down the<br />

SHIFT key after a logoff or after a Windows NT restart.


3-54 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installing a Serial Mouse<br />

Follow these steps to install a Serial Mouse on the terminal.<br />

1. Edit the boot.ini file, which is located in the root of the C drive.<br />

a. Open Windows NT Explorer<br />

b. Go to the View menu and select Folder Options.<br />

c. Select the View tab.<br />

d. Scroll down until you see a folder that is labeled Hidden Files.<br />

Make sure the button labeled Show All Files is selected and<br />

then select OK.<br />

e. Select the C drive root directory. Scroll down until you find the<br />

file named boot.ini and select it.<br />

f. Open the File menu and then select Properties.<br />

g. Uncheck the box labeled Read Only and then select OK.<br />

h. Open the boot.ini file with Notepad. It should have the<br />

following entries:<br />

[operating systems]<br />

multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT="Windows<br />

NT Workstation Version 4.00" /NoSerialMice<br />

multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(1)\WINNT="Windows<br />

NT Workstation Version 4.00 [VGA mode]" /basevideo<br />

/sos<br />

2. Delete the text /NoSerialMice. The file should now look like:<br />

3. Save the file and then restart the terminal with the serial mouse<br />

connected.<br />

After the system restarts it will see the mouse and install the<br />

supporting drivers. The drivers are located on the hard drive at<br />

C:\install\i386. If for some reason they are not on the hard drive,<br />

connect the terminal to a network and share a CD‐ROM drive with the<br />

NT Operating System disk installed, or copy the files needed to the<br />

network.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-55<br />

Calibrating the Touch Screen<br />

Be sure to observe for the following Touch Screen calibration<br />

guidelines:<br />

• Calibrate the touch screen as part of the installation process.<br />

• Recalibrate the touch screen when the system is installed at its final<br />

location.<br />

• Recalibrate whenever the terminal is moved to a new location.<br />

• Recalibrate the touch screen anytime the system has been<br />

disassembled for servicing.<br />

• The Touch Screen can be calibrated using MicroTouch (Windows)<br />

or Microcal (DOS), or it can be calibrated from the BIOS.


3-56 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Calibration Using MicroTouch (Windows)<br />

1. From the Windows Start button, select Settings→Control<br />

Panel→MicroTouch Touchscreen.<br />

2. From the MicroTouch Touchscreen Properties screen, select Calibrate<br />

to begin calibration.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-57<br />

3. The following screen is displayed with two targets. Place your<br />

finger on the target that has a finger icon pointing towards it and<br />

hold it until the statement Touch Enable is displayed over the finger<br />

icon.<br />

Note: For best results, press the screen near the circle and then<br />

slide your finger onto the circle without raising your finger from<br />

the screen.<br />

4. Using the same method as above, touch the circle near the upperright<br />

corner of the screen.


3-58 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

5. The MicroTouch Calibration dialog box then appears. Do not touch<br />

the screen until this dialog box is no longer displayed.<br />

6. From the Calibration Complete screen, select Done.<br />

7. Select Close to exit the MicroTouch program.<br />

8. From the Control Panel, select File→Close to exit the Control<br />

Panel.<br />

Calibration Using Microcal (DOS)<br />

The calibration program looks at where your finger is when you lift it<br />

off the screen, not where you touch it. Therefore, calibrate the screen as<br />

follows:<br />

1. Touch the screen near the calibration target.<br />

2. Keep your finger on the screen and slide it to the center of the<br />

target.<br />

3. Hold your finger firmly on the target for two seconds, then lift it off<br />

quickly.<br />

4. Verify that the calibration was set accurately before making a<br />

service call. Perform the calibration again if necessary.


Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 3-59<br />

Calibration From the BIOS<br />

If cursor is not stable, or false touches are suspected, run the Noise<br />

Check Utility from the Microcal program. Choose the recommended<br />

frequency (the one with the lowest noise level). This should also be<br />

done if the Touch Screen is still not calibrated after one attempt to<br />

recalibrate it.<br />

1. Set the video resolution by going to the Tools menu, Video and<br />

selecting 800 x 600 256 colors.<br />

2. Go to the Tools menu, select Noise Check.<br />

3. Follow the instruction prompts. Choose the frequency with the<br />

lowest noise level.<br />

Application software can possibly generate a dialog box from the<br />

Touch Driver, with the message that the touch screen needs to be<br />

recalibrated. If the screen appears to be working normally, then this<br />

message can be ignored. There will be a check box labeled Do not<br />

show this message again. Make sure this box is checked.<br />

1. Apply power to the terminal.<br />

2. When the screen prompt that says Touch the screen two times to enter<br />

Setup appears, wait for the second prompt to touch the screen, and<br />

then touch the screen three times. This causes the system to bypass<br />

the BIOS Setup and go directly to the Touch Screen Calibration<br />

Setup.<br />

3. As instructed on the screen, touch the circle near the lower‐left<br />

corner of the screen. For best results, press the screen near the circle<br />

and then slide your finger onto the circle without raising your<br />

finger from the screen.<br />

4. Using the same method as above, touch the circle near the upperright<br />

corner of the screen.


3-60 Chapter 3: <strong>7401</strong>-2xxx/3xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

You should receive a Successful Calibration message and then the<br />

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility should come up.<br />

Summary<br />

Out-of-Box Failures<br />

If there is a Touch Screen calibration issue during or after installation,<br />

take the following actions in the order listed:<br />

1. Recalibrate.<br />

2. If recalibration is unsuccessful after two attempts, then run the<br />

Noise check to change the frequency.<br />

3. If you are still unable to calibrate, change the touch screen glass.<br />

4. The final step is to replace the Processor Board. If this corrects the<br />

problem, then the old glass is probably OK to reuse.<br />

The RSD‐Atlanta Customer Satisfaction Hotline will replace out‐of‐box<br />

failed hard disks with identical, preloaded drives. Once a system is<br />

successfully installed, all disk contents are the responsibility of the<br />

customer. The customer is responsible for restoring operating system<br />

software and/or customer‐specific data onto replacement disks sent to<br />

repair a failed or damaged disk in the field. NCR provides recovery<br />

tools for the operating system and platform software.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Introduction<br />

Installation Summary<br />

U.K. Keyboard Configuration<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal is fully assembled at the factory. This chapter<br />

explains the mounting options and how to connect optional hardware<br />

components to the terminal.<br />

The terminal should be removed from the shipping packaging and<br />

visual checks made to verify the correct hardware configuration. The<br />

system is then configured and any communication cables are<br />

connected.<br />

Only after inspection should the power cord be attached to the system<br />

and then connected to the AC power source. Power‐up self‐tests will<br />

run to verify basic functionality.<br />

ROM‐based setup should be used to configure network options. Full<br />

configuration depends upon the system server and the management<br />

web site.<br />

Regional Options in the Control Panel must be configured for <strong>7401</strong>‐<br />

4xxx terminals equipped with a U.K. keyboard (F130, F131, or F132).<br />

Windows 2000<br />

1. From the Windows Start button, select Settings > Control Panel ><br />

Regional Settings.


4-2 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

2. On the General tab, select the Down arrow in the Your locale<br />

(location) box and select English (United Kingdom from the list.<br />

3. Select the Input Locales tab.<br />

4. Select the Add button under the Input language window.<br />

5. Select the Down arrow in the Input locale: box and select English<br />

(United Kingdom) from the list.<br />

6. Select the Down arrow in the Keyboard layout/IME: box and select<br />

United Kingdom from the list.<br />

7. Select the OK button.<br />

8. Highlight the EN English (United Kingdom) option in the Input<br />

language window and select the Set as Default button.<br />

9. At the bottom of the dialog, select the Apply button and then the<br />

OK button.<br />

10. Restart Windows.<br />

Windows XPe<br />

1. From the Windows Start button, select Control Panel > Regional<br />

and Language Options.<br />

2. On the Regional Options tab, select the Down arrow in the<br />

Standards and formats section and select English (United Kingdom)<br />

from the list.<br />

3. In the Location section, select the Down arrow and select United<br />

Kingdom from the list.<br />

4. Select the Languages tab.<br />

5. Select the Details button in the Text services and input languages<br />

section.<br />

6. Select the Add button in the Installed services section.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-3<br />

7. On the Add Input language dialog, select the Down arrow in the<br />

Input language box and select English (United Kingdom) from the<br />

list.<br />

Verify that United Kingdom displays in the Keyboard layout/IME:<br />

box.<br />

8. Select the OK button.<br />

9. On the Settings tab, select the Down arrow in the Default input<br />

language section and select English (United Kingdom) – United<br />

Kingdom as the default.<br />

10. At the bottom of the dialog, select the Apply button and then the<br />

OK button.<br />

11. Exit the Control Panel.<br />

Windows NT<br />

1. From the Windows Start button, select Settings > Control Panel ><br />

Regional Settings.<br />

2. On the General tab, select the Down arrow in the selection box and<br />

select English (United Kingdom) from the list.<br />

3. Select the Input Locales tab.<br />

4. Highlight the EN English (United Kingdom) option in the Input<br />

locales window and select the Properties button.<br />

5. Select the Down arrow on the Keyboard layout selection box and<br />

select United Kingdom from the list, then select the OK button.<br />

6. Highlight the EN English (United Kingdom) option in the Input<br />

locales window and select the Set as Default button.<br />

7. Select the Apply button. If the Files Needed dialog pops up, enter<br />

“C:\intall\i386” in the Copy files from: box and select the OK button.<br />

8. Restart Windows.


4-4 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installation Restrictions<br />

• Before installing the terminal, read and follow the guidelines in the<br />

NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> Site Preparation Guide and the NCR Workstation<br />

and Peripheral AC Wiring Guide.<br />

• Install the terminal near an electrical outlet that is easily accessible.<br />

Use the power cord as a power‐disconnect device.<br />

• Do not permit any object to rest on the power cord. Do not locate<br />

the terminal where the power cord can be walked on.<br />

• Use a grounding strap or touch a grounded metal object to<br />

discharge any static electricity from your body before servicing the<br />

terminal.<br />

• If the power cord is replaced, it must be replaced with the same<br />

type of cord with the protective shroud.<br />

• Do not route the power cord through openings with sharp edges.<br />

Caution: This unit contains hazardous voltages and should only be<br />

serviced by qualified service personnel.<br />

Caution: DO NOT connect or disconnect the transaction printer while<br />

the terminal is connected to AC power. This can result in system or<br />

printer damage.<br />

Warning: The <strong>7401</strong> must be mounted securely to prevent a hazard. It<br />

must be installed in accordance with local building codes. When<br />

mounting the terminal on a table top, use care when lifting the<br />

terminal. The approximate weight is 90 lbs. (40.8 kg).


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-5<br />

Connecting the Cables<br />

The cable connectors are located under the Cable Cover in the front of<br />

the Core Module.<br />

Cable Routing<br />

The AC Power Cord and the LAN Cable can be routed either out the<br />

bottom or the rear of the cabinet. Other cables connected to the Core<br />

Module are routed internally to <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx components within the<br />

cabinet.<br />

Cable Connector Identification<br />

CRT<br />

LAN<br />

USB 1<br />

USB 2<br />

COM 1<br />

RS-232<br />

(COM 3 & 4)<br />

Keyboard<br />

PS/2<br />

COM 2<br />

Parallel<br />

Power<br />

Microphone<br />

(optional)<br />

IRDA<br />

Speaker<br />

Audio Out<br />

Cash Drawer<br />

19901<br />

Note: COM1 and COM3 can be powered ports. They are enabled in<br />

the BIOS.<br />

Note: The COM3 & COM4 RS‐232 ports require the Dual RS‐232 Port<br />

Kit (7454‐F072) feature


4-6 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installing Peripherals<br />

The following peripherals are integrated into the <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal.<br />

Removal procedures are covered in the NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> <strong>Har</strong>dware<br />

Service Guide (B005‐0000‐1341).<br />

• Full page printer<br />

• Motorized Card Reader<br />

• U.S. and UK ruggedized keyboards with trackball<br />

• Pin Pad<br />

The following peripherals are field installable devices. Installation<br />

instructions are provided in the sections that follow.<br />

• Angled Magnetic Stripe Reader (<strong>7401</strong>‐F103)<br />

• Country keyboards ‐ used with Custom keyboard shelf (<strong>7401</strong>‐F118)<br />

Before installing any new device, unplug the <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx AC power cord<br />

to remove power from the terminal.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-7<br />

Installing the Angled Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR)<br />

A 3‐track ISO Angled MSR is an optional feature available with the<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal and also available as a kit (<strong>7401</strong>‐K103).<br />

MSR <strong>Har</strong>ness<br />

Mounting Bracket<br />

1. Use the following steps to install the Angled MSR<br />

2. Unlock the Cabinet Keylock.<br />

19902<br />

Cable<br />

Clamp<br />

Gas Shock<br />

MSR Blank<br />

Keylock<br />

19798a


4-8 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

3. Lift the door until it is supported on the Gas Shock.<br />

4. Remove the MSR Blank from the right side of the Cabinet.<br />

5. Remove the Cable Clamp.<br />

6. Plug the MSR cable into the MSR Connector on the Core Module.<br />

Cable Clamp<br />

MSR Connector<br />

7. Attach the MSR assembly using the MSR Mounting screws (2).<br />

8. Attach the Cable Clamp removed in step 5 to the MSR Mounting<br />

Bracket (rear hole).<br />

19904a<br />

Installing Country Keyboards<br />

The following international country keyboards are shipped separate<br />

from the <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal and must be installed in the field. The<br />

required keyboard and trackball cables are pre‐installed in the <strong>7401</strong>‐<br />

4xxx keyboard tray.<br />

• Swedish/Finnish Rugged Keyboard (2336‐K206)<br />

• Italian Rugged Keyboard (2336‐K207)<br />

Use the following procedures to install a country keyboard.<br />

1. Unplug the power cord to remove power from the terminal.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-9<br />

2. Unlock the cabinet lock and raise the core module door to open the<br />

cabinet.<br />

3. Slide the Keyboard Drawer forward until it stops.<br />

4. Remove the Motorized Card Reader Mounting Screw.<br />

Mushroom Studs<br />

Motorized Card Reader<br />

Mounting Screw<br />

5. Slide the Motorized Card Reader back and lower the unit until the<br />

Mushroom Studs are clear of the retaining holes.<br />

19898


4-10 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

6. Unplug the two cables from the connectors at the rear of the<br />

Motorized Card Reader.<br />

Kick-out Capacitor<br />

<strong>Har</strong>ness Connector<br />

Motorized Card<br />

Reader Cable Connector<br />

7. Loosen the Keyboard Retaining Thumb Screws (2).<br />

19897<br />

Keyboard<br />

Retaining<br />

Thumb<br />

Screws (2)<br />

(inside cabinet)<br />

8. Slide the Keyboard Drawer closed.<br />

19798h


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-11<br />

9. Pull the Keyboard Assembly forward, lift the assembly off the<br />

mushroom studs, and tilt the assembly up as shown below.<br />

Keyboard<br />

Cable<br />

Keyboard<br />

Assembly<br />

Keyboard<br />

Tray<br />

Track Ball/<br />

Port D Cable<br />

Pin Pad/<br />

Port C Cables<br />

19893b<br />

10. Disconnect the Pin Pad/Port C cable and remove the cables out<br />

through the hole in the Keyboard Assembly.<br />

11. Lay the Keyboard Assembly on a flat surface.<br />

Backing Plate<br />

Screws (8)<br />

12. Remove the Keyboard Backing Plate.<br />

Keyboard<br />

Backing Plate<br />

19895d


4-12 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

13. Insert the new keyboard.<br />

Pin Pad/Port C<br />

Cable Connector<br />

Keyboard<br />

Cable Connector<br />

Trackball/Port D<br />

Cable Connector<br />

Keyboard<br />

Backing Plate<br />

14. Install the Keyboard Backing Plate (8 screws).<br />

19895e<br />

15. Insert the cables through the hole in the Keyboard Assembly<br />

16. Connect the cables (3).<br />

17. Open the Keyboard Drawer to take up the slack in the cables.<br />

18. Insert the Keyboard Assembly onto the mushroom studs in the<br />

Keyboard Tray.<br />

19. Tighten the Keyboard Retaining Thumb Screws (2).<br />

20. Install the MSR<br />

21. Install the MSR cables.<br />

22. Slide the Keyboard Drawer closed.<br />

23. Lower the core module door.<br />

24. Lock the cabinet lock.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-13<br />

Using the Full Page Printer<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx has a full page thermal printer to provide the customer<br />

with a record of their transaction. The printer is located inside the<br />

secure cabinet and issues the printed transaction record out a slot<br />

above the keyboard in the front of the cabinet.<br />

Front Paper<br />

Guide Cover<br />

Thumb Screws<br />

Rear<br />

View<br />

Printer Roll<br />

Lever<br />

Paper Roll<br />

Holders<br />

Printer Test/<br />

Display Panel<br />

Printer<br />

Power Cord<br />

On/Off<br />

Switch<br />

Printer<br />

Power Supply<br />

19894b<br />

Loading the Paper<br />

1. Place the paper roll on the spindle.<br />

2. Install the spindle in the slots of the paper roll holders with paper<br />

feeding off the bottom of the roll towards the front of the terminal.<br />

3. Feed the paper into the rear paper guide until the auto‐load<br />

mechanism senses the paper and feeds the paper out the front of<br />

the cabinet.<br />

Note: The printhead lever must be closed for auto‐loading to function.


4-14 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Removing Paper from the Printer Feed Rolls<br />

If paper becomes jammed in the printer feed rolls:<br />

1. Unlock the cabinet Keylock.<br />

2. Raise the bottom of the Display Module Door until fully open and<br />

supported by the Gas Shock.<br />

3. Slide the Keyboard Tray forward until it stops.<br />

4. Lift the printhead lever.<br />

5. Loosen the two thumb screws and remove the Front Paper Guide<br />

Cover.<br />

6. Remove the paper.<br />

Note: You can also feed paper manually using the Form Feed button<br />

on the Printer Switch and Display Panel. Refer to the “Using the Printer<br />

Test and Display Panel” section for details.<br />

Removing Power from the Printer<br />

The printer has an On/Off switch located on the back of the printer and<br />

has a separate Power Supply located under the printer. The Printer<br />

Power Supply is plugged into the bottom connector of the Power Strip<br />

inside the terminal cabinet. Use either of the following methods to<br />

remove power:<br />

• Press the On/Off Switch to the Off position.<br />

• Unplug the Printer Power Supply plug from the Power Strip.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-15<br />

Using the Printer Test and Display Panel<br />

POWER<br />

PAPER<br />

READY<br />

ATTN<br />

ERR<br />

FORM<br />

FEED<br />

LINE<br />

FEED<br />

TEST SELECT<br />

F3 F2 F1 F0<br />

19961<br />

Display LED Indicators<br />

The LEDs provide the following status information:<br />

PAPER/POWER (green)<br />

Status<br />

Indication<br />

Printer OK Very short Off blink every 14 seconds<br />

DC power<br />

Paper supply<br />

Paper low<br />

Diagnostic mode<br />

READY (green)<br />

Status<br />

System ready<br />

<strong>Data</strong> flow<br />

Reverse channel<br />

On or Flashing when power is on<br />

Rapid On‐Off 50% cycle flashing when out of<br />

paper<br />

Rapid On‐Off 50% cycle flashing when paper low<br />

10 % On and 90% Off when in diagnostic mode<br />

Indication<br />

On = System ready to accept data Off = Not ready<br />

During receipt of data, LED blinks following state<br />

of the Busy signal<br />

When not printing during IEEE‐1284 reverse<br />

channel status, LED blinks after PtrBus signal flow


4-16 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

ATTN/ERR (yellow)<br />

Used with the buzzer to indicate the following conditions:<br />

Status<br />

Switch press<br />

System warnings<br />

System error<br />

codes<br />

Normal display<br />

Indication<br />

Short flash/beep when Switch F0‐F3 are pressed<br />

Flashing/beeping to alert operator of low paper or<br />

out of paper condition<br />

Repeating sequence of coded flash/beep tones (used<br />

during factory/depot repair)<br />

Off<br />

Panel Switches<br />

The four momentary push button switches (F0‐F3) are used for manual<br />

interaction with the printer.<br />

F0/SELECT<br />

Places the printer in On‐line or Off‐line (Test) mode. The READY LED<br />

is off when the printer is in Test mode. The ATTN/ERR LED blinks and<br />

the beep tone sounds every 14 seconds to indicate the printer is Offline.<br />

F1/TEST<br />

Alternately prints one of two test pages.<br />

• One page is a short 85 mm (3.5 in.) page with that identifies the<br />

printer and the printer manufacturer.<br />

• The second page is a full 280 mm (11 in.) page with the same<br />

information plus multiple lines of alphanumeric data scrolling<br />

across the page.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-17<br />

F2/LINE FEED<br />

Advances the paper approximately 3 mm (0.1 in.) to test simple paper<br />

movement.<br />

F3/FORM FEED<br />

Advances the paper one form length. The length of the paper feed<br />

depends on printer setup.<br />

F0 and F1 (Cutter Test)<br />

Test the paper cutter. Feeds a short blank length of paper and actuates<br />

the paper cutter. The switches must be released at the same time.<br />

Full Page Printer Diagnostics and Setup<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx full page printer is replaceable in the field as a complete<br />

module. Field‐level diagnostics and setup are not typically performed<br />

on site. Refer to the NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> ATX 38 Printer User’s Manual<br />

(B005‐0000‐1454) for diagnostic and setup information.


4-18 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Installing a <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx on a Table Top Mount<br />

A <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal attached to a Table Top Mount can be installed<br />

on any flat work surface following the height guidelines shown in the<br />

NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> Site Preparation Guide (B005‐0000‐1255).<br />

Locking<br />

Slots<br />

Locating<br />

Locking<br />

Slots<br />

19964<br />

Mounting Procedures<br />

1. Using the Table Top Mount as a template, position the Mount on<br />

the surface where the terminal is to be located and mark all hole<br />

locations with a pencil.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-19<br />

To locate the <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal so the edge of the Keyboard Tray<br />

is even with the edge of the table top, locate the front edge of the<br />

Table Top Mount 210 mm (8.25 in.) from the edge of the mounting<br />

surface.<br />

2. Drill pilot holes or through holes for the mounting screws (4) or<br />

mounting bolts. Screws or bolts used for mounting the terminal are<br />

not provided with the mount and must be purchased locally. The<br />

holes in the mount are xx mm (xx in.) in diameter.<br />

3. Drill the hole to route the cables out the bottom of the terminal, if<br />

using that cable routing solution.<br />

4. Secure the Table Top Mount to the mounting surface.<br />

Note: When the front edge of the Table Top Mount is located away<br />

from the edge of the mounting surface, it may be necessary to<br />

remove the Motorized Card Reader, Keyboard, and Sliding Drawer<br />

assembly before placing the terminal onto the mount to provide access<br />

to the mounting screws. Refer to the “Accessing the Mounting<br />

Screws” section below for details.<br />

5. Lower the terminal onto the Mount aligning the locking pins (4) on<br />

the bottom of the terminal with the slots in the mount.<br />

Caution: Use care when lifting the terminal. The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx<br />

terminal weighs approximately 90 lbs. (40.8 kg).<br />

6. Push the terminal to the back until the locating pins (2) in the back<br />

of terminal are fully engaged into the holes in the mount.<br />

7. Secure the terminal to the mount using the 8x32 screws (2).


4-20 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Accessing the Mounting Screws<br />

The following steps describe how to remove the Motorized Card<br />

Reader, Keyboard, and Sliding Drawer assembly to provide access the<br />

mounting screws.<br />

1. Unlock the cabinet lock and raise the core module door to open the<br />

cabinet.<br />

2. Slide the Keyboard Tray forward until it stops.<br />

3. Remove the Motorized Card Reader (if present) as described in the<br />

“Removing the Motorized Card Reader” section in Chapter 4 of the<br />

NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> <strong>Har</strong>dware Service Guide (B005‐0000‐1341).<br />

4. Remove the Keyboard as described in the “Removing the Keyboard<br />

Assembly” section in Chapter 4 of the NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong><br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware Service Guide (B005‐0000‐1341).<br />

5. Feed the cables through the hole in the Keyboard Tray.<br />

6. Release the Rail Latches and remove the Sliding Drawer assembly.<br />

7. Remove the two screws holding the terminal to the mount.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-21<br />

Installing a <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx on the EasyPoint 45 Pedestal<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal is shipped with the Table Top Mount attached.<br />

Use the following procedure to mount a <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal on an<br />

EasyPoint 45 Pedestal.<br />

1. Unlock the Keylock.<br />

2. Open the Display Door.<br />

3. Slide the Keyboard Tray forward to access and remove the Table<br />

Top Mount screws (2) under the keyboard at the front of the<br />

terminal.<br />

4. Slide the Remove the Table Top Mount from the bottom of the<br />

terminal.<br />

5. Attach the Table Top Mount to the top of the pedestal using the<br />

four (4) screws.<br />

The EasyPoint 45 pedestal may be secured to the floor before<br />

mounting the <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx terminal onto the pedestal. Two 12.7 mm<br />

(0.5 in.) holes are provided in the base of the pedestal. Use 11 mm<br />

or 12 mm (0.375 in. to 0.5 in.) bolts or lag screws to secure the<br />

pedestal to the floor.<br />

Refer to the NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> Site Preparation Guide (B005‐0000‐<br />

1255) for floor mounting details.<br />

6. Route the AC power cord and network cable (if used) out the hole<br />

in the bottom of the terminal and through the hole in the Table Top<br />

Mount.<br />

7. Slide the terminal into the Table Top Mount being careful not to<br />

pinch the cables.<br />

8. Secure the terminal to the Table Top Mount using the screws (2)<br />

removed in Step 3.


4-22 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

4055 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)<br />

The NCR 4055 UPS is available in two models for the <strong>7401</strong>:<br />

Item Description Volt/Hz<br />

4055‐1300‐7194 300 VA/180 Watt <strong>Kiosk</strong> UPS 120 Volt/60 Hz<br />

4055‐1500‐7194 500 VA/300 Watt <strong>Kiosk</strong> UPS 120 Volt/60 Hz<br />

Power Mon II® Software (G099‐4551‐0100) is recommended for use<br />

with the 4055 UPS and the <strong>7401</strong>.<br />

Note: On Windows 2000, the Power Mon software may appear to not<br />

fully shut the system down. In such cases you may still see a dim<br />

display. This does not cause the loss of any data.<br />

19412<br />

Installing the UPS<br />

Refer to the User’s Manual delivered with the NCR 4055 UPS before<br />

installing the UPS for use with the <strong>7401</strong>.<br />

To install the UPS with the <strong>7401</strong> connect the power cable and the LAN<br />

cable from the <strong>7401</strong> to the UPS. Then connect the in‐house LAN cable<br />

to the UPS, and the power cable on the UPS to the AC power outlet.<br />

Note: If you are installing <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx on the EasyPoint 45 Pedestal, the<br />

UPS must be installed first. See 2336‐K045 Feature Kit for more<br />

information.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-23<br />

Installing the Power Mon II® Software<br />

The Power Mon II® software is provided on CD‐ROM and may be<br />

installed over a network or using an integrated or parallel CD‐ROM<br />

drive. All operating system versions of the Power Mon software and<br />

installation <strong>doc</strong>umentation are contained on the CD.<br />

The Power Mon installation should auto start. If it doesn’t, browse the<br />

CD for the operating system you are using and run Setup.exe for that<br />

operating system. Follow the prompts to install the software.<br />

Note: When you are prompted for Configuration Code, enter 7 to<br />

identify the interface cable type.<br />

Configuring the Power Mon II® Software<br />

Once Power Mon is installed, configure the software by clicking on the<br />

Power Mon icon. Select “Configure UPS” to configure the UPS<br />

parameters such as voice messages and battery run time.<br />

Note: Battery run time for the 4055 UPS running with a <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx and<br />

a Full‐page Thermal Printer at a load of 150 VA is approximately:<br />

Item<br />

Approximate Battery Run Time<br />

300 VA (180 W) 13 minutes*<br />

500 VA (300 W) 23 minutes*<br />

* Times are approximate and may vary due to modified configurations,<br />

environmental conditions, ambient temperature, battery age, and other<br />

factors.<br />

Reference NCR EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong>Site Preparation (B005‐0000‐1255) for<br />

additional power requirements for the <strong>7401</strong>.


4-24 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Finalizing the Installation<br />

After the hardware installation has been completed, the terminal can<br />

be powered up to finalize the installation. The operating system, along<br />

with platform modifications, is pre‐installed. The following sections list<br />

the steps involved to complete the system installation for each of the<br />

Gold Disk operating systems.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win2000)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most<br />

of the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk<br />

image. Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. After the terminal reboots, it will perform a disk check and then<br />

continue with the Windows 2000 installation.<br />

2. Enter the User Name and Organization.<br />

3. Enter the Computer Name for the client.<br />

4. Enter the Administrator’s Account Password (optional)<br />

5. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the client.<br />

6. Login when prompted.<br />

7. Run the MicroTouch screen calibration from the Desktop icon.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinXPe)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most<br />

of the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk<br />

image. Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. Click the Admin button to login as Administrator.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-25<br />

2. Read the EULA (End‐User License Agreement) information in the<br />

DOS window, then type EXIT and press Enter to close the DOS<br />

window.<br />

3. Start the Network Setup Wizard.<br />

4. Select options to identify the network information for the terminal<br />

environment.<br />

5. Enter the Computer Description.<br />

6. Enter the Computer Name.<br />

7. Enter the Workgroup Name.<br />

8. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the terminal.<br />

9. Log in when prompted.<br />

Open the Control Panel or use the TouchWare Icon on the desktop and<br />

run the MicroTouch screen calibration.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinNT)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most<br />

of the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk<br />

image. Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. After the terminal reboots, press Next at the Windows Setup screen.<br />

2. Accept the Microsoft license agreement.<br />

3. Enter the User Name and Organization.<br />

4. Enter the Computer Name for the client.<br />

5. Enter the Administrator’s Account Password (optional)<br />

6. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the client.<br />

7. Log in when prompted.<br />

8. Open the Control Panel and run the MicroTouch screen calibration.


4-26 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win98) - (Discontinued)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most<br />

of the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk<br />

image. Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. When the terminal boots it enters the Windows setup routine.<br />

Note: When installing Win98 on terminals with Processor Boards<br />

(<strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx) there are few differences in the procedure as<br />

follows:<br />

d) The terminal starts the Add New <strong>Har</strong>dware Wizard.<br />

e) For each device found, permit Windows to search for new<br />

drivers (take defaults).<br />

f) After each driver is installed you are asked to reboot. Answer<br />

No.<br />

2. At the User Information screen, enter the User information. This<br />

can be done using a keyboard or you can use the touch screen<br />

keyboard. After entering the information, press Enter or touch OK.<br />

3. Go into the Control Panel and set the terminal Date and Time.<br />

In the Control Panel, run the MicroTouch screen calibration.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-27<br />

Calibrating the Touch Screen<br />

Be sure to observe for the following Touch Screen calibration<br />

guidelines:<br />

• Calibrate the touch screen as part of the installation process.<br />

• Recalibrate the touch screen when the system is installed at its final<br />

location.<br />

• Recalibrate whenever the terminal is moved to a new location.<br />

• Recalibrate the touch screen anytime the system has been<br />

disassembled for servicing.<br />

• The Touch Screen can be calibrated using MicroTouch (Windows)<br />

or Microcal (DOS), or it can be calibrated from the BIOS.<br />

Calibration Using MicroTouch (Windows)<br />

1. From the Windows Start button, select Settings→Control<br />

Panel→MicroTouch Touchscreen.<br />

2. From the MicroTouch Touchscreen Properties screen, select Calibrate<br />

to begin calibration.


4-28 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

3. The following screen is displayed with two targets. Place your<br />

finger on the target that has a finger icon pointing towards it and<br />

hold it until the statement Touch Enable is displayed over the finger<br />

icon.<br />

Note: For best results, press the screen near the circle and then<br />

slide your finger onto the circle without raising your finger from<br />

the screen.<br />

4. Using the same method as above, touch the circle near the upperright<br />

corner of the screen.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-29<br />

5. The MicroTouch Calibration dialog box then appears. Do not touch<br />

the screen until this dialog box is no longer displayed.<br />

6. From the Calibration Complete screen, select Done.<br />

7. Select Close to exit the MicroTouch program.<br />

8. From the Control Panel, select File→Close to exit the Control<br />

Panel.<br />

Calibration Using Microcal (DOS)<br />

The calibration program looks at where your finger is when you lift it<br />

off the screen, not where you touch it. Therefore, calibrate the screen as<br />

follows:<br />

1. Touch the screen near the calibration target.<br />

2. Keep your finger on the screen and slide it to the center of the<br />

target.<br />

3. Hold your finger firmly on the target for two seconds, then lift it off<br />

quickly.<br />

4. Verify that the calibration was set accurately before making a<br />

service call. Perform the calibration again if necessary.


4-30 Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation<br />

Calibration from the BIOS<br />

If cursor is not stable, or false touches are suspected, run the Noise<br />

Check Utility from the Microcal program. Choose the recommended<br />

frequency (the one with the lowest noise level). This should also be<br />

done if the Touch Screen is still not calibrated after one attempt to<br />

recalibrate it.<br />

5. Set the video resolution by going to the Tools menu, Video and<br />

selecting 800 x 600 256 colors.<br />

6. Go to the Tools menu, select Noise Check.<br />

7. Follow the instruction prompts. Choose the frequency with the<br />

lowest noise level.<br />

Application software can possibly generate a dialog box from the<br />

Touch Driver, with the message that the touch screen needs to be<br />

recalibrated. If the screen appears to be working normally, then this<br />

message can be ignored. There will be a check box labeled Do not<br />

show this message again. Make sure this box is checked.<br />

1. Apply power to the terminal.<br />

2. When the screen prompt that says Touch the screen two times to enter<br />

Setup appears, wait for the second prompt to touch the screen, and<br />

then touch the screen three times. This causes the system to bypass<br />

the BIOS Setup and go directly to the Touch Screen Calibration<br />

Setup.<br />

3. As instructed on the screen, touch the circle near the lower‐left<br />

corner of the screen. For best results, press the screen near the circle<br />

and then slide your finger onto the circle without raising your<br />

finger from the screen.<br />

4. Using the same method as above, touch the circle near the upperright<br />

corner of the screen.<br />

You should receive a Successful Calibration message and then the<br />

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility should come up.


Chapter 4: <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx <strong>Har</strong>dware Installation 4-31<br />

Summary<br />

Out-of-Box Failures<br />

If there is a Touch Screen calibration issue during or after installation,<br />

take the following actions in the order listed:<br />

1. Recalibrate.<br />

2. If recalibration is unsuccessful after two attempts, then run the<br />

Noise check to change the frequency.<br />

3. If you are still unable to calibrate, change the touch screen glass.<br />

4. The final step is to replace the Processor Board. If this corrects the<br />

problem, then the old glass is probably OK to reuse.<br />

The RSD‐Atlanta Customer Satisfaction Hotline will replace out‐of‐box<br />

failed hard disks with identical, preloaded drives. Once a system is<br />

successfully installed, all disk contents are the responsibility of the<br />

customer. The customer is responsible for restoring operating system<br />

software and/or customer‐specific data onto replacement disks sent to<br />

repair a failed or damaged disk in the field. NCR provides recovery<br />

tools for the operating system and platform software.


Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Introduction<br />

This chapter describes how to configure the BIOS CMOS options.<br />

Following this Introduction, there are sections specific to <strong>7401</strong>‐<br />

22xx/35xx/45xx terminals with BIOS Version 2.2.1.x (Pentium<br />

III/Celeron processors), <strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx terminals with ACPI BIOS<br />

Version 2.3.x.x (Pentium III/Celeron processors), and to <strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx<br />

terminals with BIOS Version 1.5.0.4 (Pentium processor). This older<br />

BIOS, version 1.5.0.4, is discontinued but is included in this chapter for<br />

reference purposes.<br />

Note: An external alphanumeric keyboard is not required to run the<br />

BIOS CMOS Setup Utility, but a keyboard makes the setup easier.<br />

Entering Setup without a Keyboard<br />

1. Apply power to the terminal.<br />

2. Calibrate the touch screen.<br />

a) When the screen prompt that says Touch the screen two times to<br />

enter Setup appears, touch the screen three times. This causes<br />

the system to bypass the BIOS Setup and go directly to the<br />

Touch Screen Calibration Setup. With Pentium III/Celeron<br />

terminals, you will not see this prompt if the Boot‐Time<br />

Diagnostics Screen is disabled, but you can still enter setup by<br />

touching the screen three times.<br />

Note: Setup can also be entered from the Boot Menu that is<br />

displayed when you press ESC during POST.


5-2 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Entering Setup Using a Keyboard<br />

b) As instructed on the screen, touch the circle near the lower‐left<br />

corner of the screen. For best results, press the screen near the<br />

circle and then slide your finger onto the circle without raising<br />

your finger from the screen.<br />

c) Using the same method as above, touch the circle near the<br />

upper‐right corner of the screen.<br />

You should receive a Successful Calibration message and then the<br />

PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility should come up.<br />

d) Select the setup parameters by touching the controls at the<br />

bottom of the screen.<br />

1. Apply power to the terminal.<br />

2. Press the F2 key when the message at the bottom of the screen<br />

prompts you to do so. With Pentium III/Celeron terminals, you will<br />

not see this prompt if the Boot‐Time Diagnostics Screen is disabled,<br />

but you can still enter setup by pressing F2.<br />

Note: Setup can also be entered from the Boot Menu that is<br />

displayed when you press ESC during POST.


Chapter 5: Setup 5-3<br />

How to Select Menu Options<br />

Setting the Date and Time<br />

The following keyboard controls are used to select the various menu<br />

options and to make changes to their values.<br />

• Use the arrow keys to select (highlight) options and menu screens.<br />

• Use the + and ‐ (or F5 and F6) keys to change field values.<br />

• To view help information on the possible selections for the<br />

highlighted item, press F1.<br />

• To save the changes, move the cursor to the Exit Menu, select either<br />

Save Changes & Exit or Save Changes, and press Enter.<br />

Note: If you are not using an external keyboard, you can touch the<br />

menu controls at the bottom of the screen. If you encounter difficulty<br />

doing this, recalibrate the screen.<br />

To set the date and time, perform the following steps:<br />

1. In the Setup Main menu, move your cursor to the System Time field,<br />

type the desired value, and press Tab or Enter to continue with the<br />

next field.<br />

2. Enter the desired date in the System Date field the same way as the<br />

last step.<br />

3. Move the cursor to the Exit menu, select Exit Saving Changes or<br />

Save Changes, and press Enter.


5-4 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Setting Passwords<br />

To set passwords, perform the following steps:<br />

1. Move the cursor to the Set Supervisor Password selection and press<br />

Enter. The Set Supervisor Password menu displays. From this menu,<br />

the person setting up the password system can set the security<br />

password. Users can set user passwords.<br />

2. Move the cursor to the Exit menu, select Exit Saving Changes and<br />

press Enter.<br />

Note: Only clear a password after obtaining the permission of the<br />

responsible supervisor.<br />

If the supervisor password is lost, it can be cleared by shorting the<br />

appropriate pins on the main processor board. For the location of these<br />

pins, refer to the EasyPoint <strong>7401</strong> <strong>Har</strong>dware Service Guide.<br />

If the user password is lost, and the supervisor is not available, then<br />

the above procedure can be used to clear the supervisor password.<br />

Then new supervisor and user passwords can be defined.


Chapter 5: Setup 5-5<br />

Configuring a <strong>Har</strong>d Drive<br />

Setting Memory Cache<br />

Note: Primary Master, Secondary Master, Primary Slave and<br />

Secondary Slave refer to the IDE drives.<br />

After installing a hard drive, you need to configure the hard drive<br />

using Setup. Perform the following steps:<br />

1. On the Setup Main menu, select the appropriate IDE Adapter (such<br />

as, Primary Master) field and press Enter. A sub‐menu displays for<br />

the Primary Master drive that you selected.<br />

2. Press Enter on the Type field. The workstation automatically fills<br />

out the remaining fields, depending on the installed drive.<br />

3. Move the cursor to the Exit menu, select Exit Saving Changes and<br />

press Enter.<br />

The default setting enables memory cache. If your application requires<br />

memory cache to be disabled, you can change it by performing the<br />

following steps:<br />

1. Move the cursor to the Cache Memory field on the Advanced menu<br />

and press Enter. The Cache Memory menu displays.<br />

2. Select Enabled in the Memory Cache field to enable the memory<br />

cache.<br />

3. Set the other fields on this menu as desired. Select Help for more<br />

information.<br />

4. Move the cursor to the Exit menu, select Exit Saving Changes and<br />

press Enter.


5-6 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Setting Memory Shadow<br />

Setting Boot Options<br />

The default setting enables memory shadow. This can i<strong>ncr</strong>ease your<br />

workstationʹs performance. This applies only if your workstation has a<br />

plug‐in video board. If you want to disable the memory shadowing,<br />

perform the following steps:<br />

1. Move the cursor to the Memory Shadow field on the Main menu and<br />

press Enter. The Memory Shadow menu appears.<br />

2. Select Disabled in the Video Shadow field to disable the video<br />

shadow.<br />

3. Move the cursor to the Exit menu, select Exit Saving Changes or Save<br />

Changes, and press Enter.<br />

To set boot options, perform the following steps:<br />

1. Move the cursor to the Boot menu. The list of boot devices displays.<br />

2. Select the sequence of drives that the workstation will access when<br />

booting the system.<br />

3. Move the cursor to the Exit menu, select Exit Saving Changes and<br />

press Enter.


Chapter 5: Setup 5-7<br />

Allocating Interrupts<br />

On the <strong>7401</strong>, limited control of interrupt allocation is provided through<br />

the BIOS Setup Utility. Due to the nature of the PCI bus, the Plug and<br />

Play subsystem allocates the interrupts of PCI devices using all<br />

available interrupts.<br />

To free IRQ15, it is necessary to disable the secondary IDE bus. To do<br />

this, in the Advanced menu, choose Primary in the Local BUS IDE<br />

adapter selection.<br />

To free IRQs 4, 3, or 7, in the I/O Device Configuration selection, disable<br />

COM A, COM B, or the Parallel port, respectively.<br />

To finalize the freeing of interrupts and make unused interrupts<br />

available for use by PCI devices, it is necessary to reset the<br />

configuration data. This can be done in the Advanced menu.<br />

To use ISA devices that require interrupts, it is necessary to reserve<br />

those interrupts so that those interrupts are not allocated by the BIOS<br />

to PCI devices. To do this, in the Advanced menu, choose Advanced<br />

Chipset Control. Choose PCI/PNP IRQ Resource Exclusion, then set all<br />

ISA interrupts to Reserved.<br />

Restoring Factory Settings<br />

To automatically reset all values to their default settings for the current<br />

screen, press F9. The terminal will automatically load BIOS default<br />

CMOS values for boot up.<br />

To reset all BIOS settings to their default settings go to the Exit menu,<br />

press F9, select either Save Changes & Exit or Save Changes, and press<br />

Enter.<br />

Refer to the “BIOS Default CMOS Values” section later in this chapter<br />

for the pre‐installed Setup defaults.


5-8 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

BIOS Default CMOS Values (<strong>7401</strong>-22xx/35xx/45xx BIOS Version 2.2.1.x)<br />

The following are the BIOS default CMOS values for the workstation.<br />

Note: When installing a new BIOS from the CD, the Processor Board<br />

type is automatically detected and the correct BIOS is automatically<br />

installed<br />

Main Values<br />

Note: An asterisk (*) indicates a variable value based on system<br />

specification.<br />

System Time<br />

System Date<br />

Legacy Diskette A:<br />

Legacy Diskette B:<br />

Primary Master *<br />

Type<br />

Total Sectors *<br />

Maximum Capacity *<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers<br />

LBA Mode Control<br />

(variable)<br />

(variable)<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Auto<br />

16 Sectors<br />

Enabled<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode FPI0 4/DMA 2<br />

Ultra DMA Mode Mode 2<br />

Primary Slave<br />

Type<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers<br />

LBA Mode Control<br />

None<br />

Auto<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled


Chapter 5: Setup 5-9<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode<br />

Standard<br />

Ultra DMA Mode<br />

Disabled<br />

Secondary Master<br />

CD‐ROM<br />

Type<br />

Auto<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers<br />

Disabled<br />

LBA Mode Control<br />

Disabled<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode FPI0 4/DMA 2<br />

Ultra DMA Mode Mode 2<br />

Secondary Slave<br />

None<br />

Type<br />

Auto<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers<br />

Disabled<br />

LBA Mode Control<br />

Disabled<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode<br />

Standard<br />

Ultra DMA Mode<br />

Disabled<br />

System Memory<br />

640 KB<br />

Extended Memory *<br />

Advanced Values<br />

Installed O/S<br />

Secured Setup Configuration<br />

Reset Confirmation <strong>Data</strong><br />

Cache Memory<br />

Other<br />

No<br />

NO


5-10 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Memory Cache<br />

Cache System BIOS<br />

Cache Video BIOS<br />

Cache Base 0‐512 k<br />

Cache Base 512K‐640 k<br />

Cache Extended Memory<br />

Cache A000‐AFFF<br />

Cache B000‐BFFF<br />

Cache C800‐CBFF<br />

Cache CC00‐CFFF<br />

Cache D000‐D3FF<br />

Cache D400‐D7FF<br />

Cache D800‐DBFF<br />

Cache DC00‐DFFF<br />

Cache E000‐E3FF<br />

Cache E400‐E7FF<br />

Cache E400‐E7FF<br />

Cache EC00‐EFFF<br />

PS/2 Port<br />

USB Port 2<br />

I/O Device Configuration<br />

Enabled<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Back<br />

Write Back<br />

Write Back<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Protect<br />

Touchscreen<br />

Auto<br />

Serial Port A<br />

Enabled<br />

Base I/O Address/IRQ 3F8/IRQ 4<br />

Powered Port<br />

Auto<br />

Serial Port B<br />

Enabled<br />

Base I/O Address/IRQ 2F8/IRQ 3


Chapter 5: Setup 5-11<br />

Parallel Port<br />

Mode<br />

Enabled<br />

ECP<br />

Base I/O Address 378<br />

Interrupt IRQ 7<br />

DMA Channel DMA 1<br />

Fdc on Lpt<br />

Floppy Disk Controller<br />

Serial Port C<br />

Mode<br />

Base I/O Address<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Enabled<br />

Normal<br />

3E8<br />

Interrupt IRQ 5<br />

Powered Port<br />

Note: Must be set to On for the<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx with Pin Pad<br />

Serial Port D<br />

Base I/O Address<br />

Auto<br />

Enabled<br />

2E8<br />

Interrupt IRQ 11<br />

Mode<br />

Disk‐On‐Chip Address<br />

MSR Address<br />

MSR Interrupt 6<br />

System Monitors<br />

+12 V Status *<br />

+ 2.5 V Status *<br />

+ 5 V Status *<br />

CPU Temperature *<br />

RS‐232<br />

CE00‐CFFF<br />

CC00‐CDFF


5-12 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

System Temperature *<br />

Vcc Status *<br />

Vcore Status *<br />

Vlcd Status *<br />

Vtt Status *<br />

Multiple ROM Menu<br />

Parallel CD‐ROM Boot<br />

On‐board Intel SLP<br />

On‐board Intel LAN<br />

On‐board Intel PXE<br />

Lucent WaveLAN ROM<br />

WaveLAN PXE ROM<br />

Selectable ROM 7<br />

Selectable ROM 8<br />

Selectable ROM 9<br />

Selectable ROM 10<br />

Selectable ROM 11<br />

Selectable ROM 12<br />

Selectable ROM 13<br />

Selectable ROM 14<br />

Selectable ROM 15<br />

Selectable ROM 16<br />

Beep Error Codes<br />

Large Disk Access Mode<br />

Local Bus IDE Adapter<br />

Advanced Chip Set Control<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Enabled<br />

Enabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Off<br />

DOS<br />

Both


Chapter 5: Setup 5-13<br />

Graphics Aperture<br />

Enable memory gap<br />

ECC Config<br />

SERR signal condition<br />

Default Primary Video Adapter<br />

PCI/PNP UMB Resource Exclusion<br />

C800 ‐ CBFF<br />

CC00 – CFFF<br />

D000 – D3FF<br />

D400 – D7FF<br />

D800 – DBFF<br />

DC00 ‐ DFFF<br />

PCI/PNP IRQ Resource Exclusion<br />

IRQ 3<br />

IRQ 4<br />

IRQ 5<br />

IRQ 7<br />

IRQ 9<br />

IRQ 10<br />

IRQ 11<br />

PCI/IRQ line 1<br />

PCI/IRQ line 2<br />

PCI/IRQ line 3<br />

PCI/IRQ line 4<br />

Boot-Time Diagnostic Screen<br />

QuickBoot Mode<br />

64 MB<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Multip0le bit<br />

AGP<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Reserved<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Auto Select<br />

Auto Select<br />

Auto Select<br />

Auto Select<br />

Disabled<br />

Enabled


5-14 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Continuous POST<br />

Boot menu retry<br />

Allow Warm Boot<br />

Legacy USB Support<br />

Disabled<br />

Keyboard<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Security Values<br />

Supervisor Password Is<br />

User Password Is<br />

Set Supervisor Password<br />

Set User Password<br />

Diskette Access<br />

Fixed Disk Boot Sector<br />

Password on Boot<br />

Clear<br />

Clear<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter<br />

Supervisor<br />

Normal<br />

Disabled<br />

Power Values<br />

Power Savings<br />

Standby Timeout<br />

Auto Suspend Timeout<br />

IDE Drive 0 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 1 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 2 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 3 Monitoring<br />

PCI Bus Monitoring<br />

Video Power State Control<br />

Disabled<br />

Off<br />

Off<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Auto<br />

Boot Values<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d Drive


Chapter 5: Setup 5-15<br />

CD-ROM<br />

Removable Devices<br />

IBA 4.0.22 Slot 0070<br />

Exit Values<br />

Exit Saving Changes<br />

Exit Discarding Changes<br />

Load Setup Defaults<br />

Discard Changes<br />

Save Changes<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter


5-16 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Interrupts (<strong>7401</strong>-22xx/35xx/45xx BIOS Version 2.2.1.x)<br />

The following table lists the default settings. To resolve any conflicts,<br />

refer to the notes that follow the table.<br />

IRQ<br />

System Resource<br />

NMI I/O channel check<br />

0 Reserved, interval timer<br />

1 Reserved, keyboard buffer full<br />

2 Reserved, cascade interrupt<br />

3 Communications port (COM 2) or Port B<br />

4 Communications port (COM 1) or Port A<br />

5 Communications port (COM 3) or Port C<br />

6 MSR<br />

7 Parallel port 1<br />

8 Real time clock<br />

9 System monitor<br />

10 Audio, LAN<br />

11 Communications port (COM 4) or Port D<br />

12 PS/2 compatible mouse port<br />

13 Math coprocessor<br />

14 On‐board IDE<br />

15 Secondary IDE<br />

The Mouse uses IRQ 12 and so does the Touch Screen. Since the Touch<br />

Screen serves as a mouse, it cannot be freed up unless you donʹt want<br />

to use either. The Audio and LAN share IRQ 10, and since these are<br />

PCI IRQs, they can move around depending on what is available in the<br />

system.


Chapter 5: Setup 5-17<br />

Memory Map (<strong>7401</strong>-22xx/35xx/45xx BIOS Version 2.2.1.x)<br />

The following table details the memory map for <strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/35xx/45xx<br />

terminals BIOS Version 2.2.1.x (Pentium III/Celeron processors). The<br />

ESCD area from ED000‐EDFFF is not available for use as an Upper<br />

Memory Block (UMB) by memory managers. The area from E0000‐<br />

EBFFF is currently not used by the BIOS and is available for use as UMB<br />

by memory managers. Parts of this area may be used by future versions<br />

of the BIOS to add i<strong>ncr</strong>eased functionality.<br />

Address Range (hex) Size Description<br />

FECFF000‐FECFF01B 27<br />

LAN PXE ROM<br />

100000‐10000000 255 MB Extended memory<br />

F0000‐FFFFF 64 kB System BIOS<br />

EE000‐EFFFF 8 kB Main BIOS (available as UMB)<br />

ED000‐EDFFF 4 kB ESCD (plug and play configuration<br />

area)<br />

EC000‐ECFFF 4 kB OEM (available as UMB)<br />

E0000‐EBFFF 48 kB BIOS Reserved (currently available<br />

as UMB)<br />

D0000‐DFFFF 64 kB Available HI DOS memory<br />

CE000‐CFFFF 8 kB Flash Disk (optional)<br />

CC000‐CDFFF 8 kB NCR Trigantor MSR (optional)<br />

C0000‐CBFFF 48 kB Onboard video BIOS<br />

A0000‐BFFFF 128 kB Reserved for video memory<br />

9FC00‐9FFFF 1 kB Extended BIOS <strong>Data</strong> (moveable by<br />

QEMM, 386MAX)<br />

80000‐9FBFF 127 kB Extended conventional<br />

00000‐7FFFF 512 kB Conventional


5-18 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

BIOS Default CMOS Values (<strong>7401</strong>-26xx/46xx BIOS Version 2.3.x.x)<br />

The following are the default CMOS values for the ACPI BIOS on the<br />

Summa II processor boards in the <strong>7401</strong>‐26xx and 46xx terminals.<br />

Note: When installing a new BIOS from the CD, the Processor Board<br />

type is automatically detected and the correct BIOS is automatically<br />

installed<br />

Main Values<br />

Note: An asterisk (*) indicates a variable value based on system<br />

specification.<br />

System Time<br />

System Date<br />

Legacy Diskette A:<br />

Legacy Diskette B:<br />

Primary Master *<br />

Type<br />

Total Sectors *<br />

Maximum Capacity *<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers<br />

LBA Mode Control<br />

(variable)<br />

(variable)<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Auto<br />

16 Sectors<br />

Enabled<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode FPI0 4/DMA 2<br />

Ultra DMA Mode<br />

Primary Slave<br />

Type<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers<br />

Disabled<br />

None<br />

Auto<br />

Disabled


Chapter 5: Setup 5-19<br />

LBA Mode Control<br />

Disabled<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode<br />

Standard<br />

Ultra DMA Mode<br />

Disabled<br />

Secondary Master<br />

CD‐ROM<br />

Type<br />

Auto<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers<br />

Disabled<br />

LBA Mode Control<br />

Disabled<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode FPI0 4/DMA 2<br />

Ultra DMA Mode Mode 2<br />

Secondary Slave<br />

None<br />

Type<br />

Auto<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers<br />

Disabled<br />

LBA Mode Control<br />

Disabled<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode<br />

Standard<br />

Ultra DMA Mode<br />

Disabled<br />

System Memory<br />

640 KB<br />

Extended Memory *<br />

Advanced Values<br />

Installed O/S<br />

Secured Setup Configuration<br />

Reset Confirmation <strong>Data</strong><br />

Other<br />

No<br />

No


5-20 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Cache Memory<br />

Memory Cache<br />

Cache System BIOS<br />

Cache Video BIOS<br />

Cache Base 0‐512 k<br />

Cache Base 512K‐640 k<br />

Cache Extended Memory<br />

Cache A000‐AFFF<br />

Cache B000‐BFFF<br />

Cache C800‐CBFF<br />

Cache CC00‐CFFF<br />

Cache D000‐D3FF<br />

Cache D400‐D7FF<br />

Cache D800‐DBFF<br />

Cache DC00‐DFFF<br />

Cache E000‐E3FF<br />

Cache E400‐E7FF<br />

Cache EC00‐EFFF<br />

PS/2 Port<br />

USB Port 2<br />

I/O Device Configuration<br />

Enabled<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Back<br />

Write Back<br />

Write Back<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Protect<br />

Write Protect<br />

Touchscreen<br />

Auto<br />

Serial Port A<br />

Enabled<br />

Base I/O Address/IRQ 3F8/IRQ 4<br />

Powered Port<br />

Auto<br />

Serial Port B<br />

Enabled<br />

Base I/O Address/IRQ 2F8/IRQ 3


Chapter 5: Setup 5-21<br />

Parallel Port<br />

Mode<br />

Enabled<br />

ECP<br />

Base I/O Address 378<br />

Interrupt IRQ 7<br />

DMA Channel DMA 1<br />

Fdc on Lpt<br />

Floppy Disk Controller<br />

Serial Port C<br />

Mode<br />

Base I/O Address<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Enabled<br />

Normal<br />

3E8<br />

Interrupt IRQ 5<br />

Powered Port<br />

Note: Must be set to On for the<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx with Pin Pad<br />

Serial Port D<br />

Base I/O Address<br />

Auto<br />

Enabled<br />

2E8<br />

Interrupt IRQ 11<br />

Mode<br />

Disk‐On‐Chip Address<br />

MSR Address<br />

MSR Interrupt 6<br />

System Monitors<br />

+12 V Status *<br />

+ 2.5 V Status *<br />

+ 5 V Status *<br />

CPU Temperature *<br />

RS‐232<br />

CE00‐CFFF<br />

CC00‐CDFF


5-22 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

System Temperature *<br />

Vcc Status *<br />

Vcore Status *<br />

Vlcd Status *<br />

Vtt Status *<br />

Multiple ROM Menu<br />

Parallel CD‐ROM Boot<br />

On‐board Intel SLP<br />

On‐board Intel LAN<br />

On‐board Intel PXE<br />

Lucent WaveLAN ROM<br />

WaveLAN PXE ROM<br />

Selectable ROM 7<br />

Selectable ROM 8<br />

Selectable ROM 9<br />

Selectable ROM 10<br />

Selectable ROM 11<br />

Selectable ROM 12<br />

Selectable ROM 13<br />

Selectable ROM 14<br />

Selectable ROM 15<br />

Selectable ROM 16<br />

Beep Error Codes<br />

Large Disk Access Mode<br />

Local Bus IDE Adapter<br />

Advanced Chip Set Control<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Enabled<br />

Enabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Off<br />

DOS<br />

Both


Chapter 5: Setup 5-23<br />

Graphics Aperture<br />

Enable memory gap<br />

ECC Config<br />

SERR signal condition<br />

Default Primary Video Adapter<br />

Speedstep Mode<br />

PCI/PNP UMB Resource Exclusion<br />

C800 ‐ CBFF<br />

CC00 – CFFF<br />

D000 – D3FF<br />

D400 – D7FF<br />

D800 – DBFF<br />

DC00 ‐ DFFF<br />

PCI/PNP IRQ Resource Exclusion<br />

IRQ 3<br />

IRQ 4<br />

IRQ 5<br />

IRQ 7<br />

IRQ 9<br />

IRQ 10<br />

IRQ 11<br />

PCI/IRQ line 1<br />

PCI/IRQ line 2<br />

PCI/IRQ line 3<br />

PCI/IRQ line 4<br />

Boot-Time Diagnostic Screen<br />

64 MB<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Multip0le bit<br />

AGP<br />

Enabled<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Reserved<br />

Available<br />

Available<br />

Auto Select<br />

Auto Select<br />

Auto Select<br />

Auto Select<br />

Disabled


5-24 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

QuickBoot Mode<br />

Continuous POST<br />

Boot menu retry<br />

Allow Warm Boot<br />

Speaker Volume<br />

Legacy USB Support<br />

Enabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Keyboard<br />

Disabled<br />

Soft<br />

Disabled<br />

Security Values<br />

Supervisor Password Is<br />

User Password Is<br />

Set Supervisor Password<br />

Set User Password<br />

Diskette Access<br />

Fixed Disk Boot Sector<br />

Password on Boot<br />

Clear<br />

Clear<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter<br />

Supervisor<br />

Normal<br />

Disabled<br />

Power Values<br />

Power Savings<br />

Standby Timeout<br />

Auto Suspend Timeout<br />

IDE Drive 0 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 1 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 2 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 3 Monitoring<br />

PCI Bus Monitoring<br />

Video Power State Control<br />

Disabled<br />

Off<br />

Off<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Auto


Chapter 5: Setup 5-25<br />

Boot Values<br />

IBA 4.0.22 Slot 0070<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d Drive<br />

CD-ROM<br />

Removable Devices<br />

Exit Values<br />

Exit Saving Changes<br />

Exit Discarding Changes<br />

Load Setup Defaults<br />

Discard Changes<br />

Save Changes<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter<br />

Press Enter


5-26 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Interrupts (<strong>7401</strong>-26xx/46xx BIOS Version 2.3.x.x)<br />

The following table lists the default settings. To resolve any conflicts,<br />

refer to the notes that follow the table.<br />

IRQ<br />

System Resource<br />

NMI I/O channel check<br />

0 Reserved, interval timer<br />

1 Reserved, keyboard buffer full<br />

2 Reserved, cascade interrupt<br />

3 Communications port (COM 2) or Port B<br />

4 Communications port (COM 1) or Port A<br />

5 Communications port (COM 3) or Port C<br />

6 MSR<br />

7 Parallel port 1<br />

8 Real time clock<br />

9 System monitor<br />

10 Audio, LAN<br />

11 Communications port (COM 4) or Port D<br />

12 PS/2 compatible mouse port<br />

13 Math coprocessor<br />

14 On‐board IDE<br />

15 Secondary IDE<br />

The Mouse uses IRQ 12 and so does the Touch Screen. Since the Touch<br />

Screen serves as a mouse, it cannot be freed up unless you donʹt want<br />

to use either. The Audio and LAN share IRQ 10, and since these are<br />

PCI IRQs, they can move around depending on what is available in the<br />

system.


Chapter 5: Setup 5-27<br />

Memory Map (<strong>7401</strong>-26xx/46xx BIOS Version 2.3.x.x)<br />

The following table details the memory map for <strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx<br />

terminals BIOS Version 2.3.1.2 (Pentium III/Celeron processors with<br />

ACPI). The ESCD area from ED000‐EDFFF is not available for use as an<br />

Upper Memory Block (UMB) by memory managers. The area from<br />

E0000‐EBFFF is currently not used by the BIOS and is available for use as<br />

UMB by memory managers. Parts of this area may be used by future<br />

versions of the BIOS to add i<strong>ncr</strong>eased functionality.<br />

Address Range (hex) Size Description<br />

FECFF000‐FECFF01B 27<br />

LAN PXE ROM<br />

100000‐10000000 255 MB Extended memory<br />

F0000‐FFFFF 64 kB System BIOS<br />

EE000‐EFFFF 8 kB Main BIOS (available as UMB)<br />

ED000‐EDFFF 4 kB ESCD (plug and play configuration<br />

area)<br />

EC000‐ECFFF 4 kB OEM (available as UMB)<br />

E0000‐EBFFF 48 kB BIOS Reserved (currently available<br />

as UMB)<br />

D0000‐DFFFF 64 kB Available HI DOS memory<br />

CE000‐CFFFF 8 kB Flash Disk (optional)<br />

CC000‐CDFFF 8 kB NCR Trigantor MSR (optional)<br />

C0000‐CBFFF 48 kB Onboard video BIOS<br />

A0000‐BFFFF 128 kB Reserved for video memory<br />

9FC00‐9FFFF 1 kB Extended BIOS <strong>Data</strong> (moveable by<br />

QEMM, 386MAX)<br />

80000‐9FBFF 127 kB Extended conventional<br />

00000‐7FFFF 512 kB Conventional


5-28 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

BIOS Default CMOS Values (<strong>7401</strong>-21xx/31xx BIOS Version 1.5.0.4 -<br />

Discontinued)<br />

The following are the BIOS default CMOS values for the terminal.<br />

Note: When installing a new BIOS from the CD, the Processor Board<br />

type is automatically detected and the correct BIOS is automatically<br />

installed<br />

Main Values<br />

System Time<br />

System Date<br />

Legacy Diskette A:<br />

Legacy Diskette B:<br />

IDE Primary Master<br />

(variable)<br />

(variable)<br />

144 MV/1.25 MV, 3 ½ʺ<br />

Disabled<br />

Type<br />

[Auto]<br />

Cylinders 4191<br />

Heads 16<br />

Sectors/Track 63<br />

Maximum Capacity 2163 MB<br />

Multi‐Sector Transfers 16 Sectors<br />

LBA Mode Control Enabled<br />

32 Bit I/O Disabled<br />

Transfer Mode Fast PIO 4<br />

Ultra DMA Mode Disabled<br />

IDE Primary Slave<br />

Type<br />

None


Chapter 5: Setup 5-29<br />

IDE Secondary Master<br />

Type<br />

IDE Secondary Slave<br />

Type<br />

Memory Cache<br />

Cache System BIOS area<br />

Cache Video BIOS area<br />

System Memory<br />

Extended Memory<br />

Power Savings<br />

Standby Timeout<br />

Auto Suspend Timeout<br />

Fixed Disk<br />

Video<br />

IDE Drive 0 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 1 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 2 Monitoring<br />

IDE Drive 3 Monitoring<br />

PCI Bus Monitoring<br />

Boot sequence<br />

1. LANDesk ® Service<br />

Agent II<br />

2. <strong>Har</strong>d Drive<br />

Continuous POST<br />

None<br />

None<br />

Enabled<br />

Enabled<br />

Disabled<br />

640 kB<br />

31744 kB<br />

Disabled<br />

Off<br />

Off<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled


5-30 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Advanced Values<br />

I/O Device Configuration<br />

Local Bus IDE adapter<br />

Serial port A<br />

Serial port B<br />

Mode<br />

Parallel port<br />

Mode<br />

Floppy disk controller<br />

Disk-On-Chip Address<br />

MSR Address<br />

Plug and Play<br />

Reset Configuration <strong>Data</strong><br />

PS/2 Mouse<br />

Large Disk Access Mode<br />

Secured Setup Configurations<br />

Primary<br />

Auto<br />

Auto<br />

Normal<br />

Auto<br />

Bi‐directional<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

Disabled<br />

No<br />

No<br />

Auto<br />

DOS<br />

No<br />

PCI Configuration<br />

ISA Graphics Device Installed<br />

PCI/PNP ISA UMB Region Exclusion<br />

No<br />

Available (all)


Chapter 5: Setup 5-31<br />

Interrupts (<strong>7401</strong>-21xx/31xx BIOS Version 1.5.0.4 - Discontinued)<br />

The following table lists the default settings.<br />

IRQ<br />

System Resource<br />

NMI I/O Channel Check<br />

0 Reserved, Interval Timer<br />

1 Reserved, Keyboard buffer full<br />

2 Reserved, Cascade interrupt<br />

3 Serial Port 2<br />

4 Serial Port 1<br />

5 User available<br />

6 Reserved, Floppy<br />

7 Parallel Port 1<br />

8 Real Time Clock<br />

9 NCR Motion, Thermal interrupt<br />

10 LAN<br />

11 Windows Sound System/USB<br />

12 Touch Screen<br />

13 Reserved, Math coprocessor<br />

14 On‐board IDE (available if IDE is disabled)<br />

15 MSR


5-32 Chapter 5: Setup<br />

Memory Map (<strong>7401</strong>-21xx/31xx BIOS Version 1.5.0.4 -<br />

Discontinued)<br />

The following table details the memory map for the <strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/21xx<br />

terminals BIOS Version 1.5.0.4 (Pentium processor). The ESCD area<br />

from ED000‐EDFFF is not available for use as an Upper Memory Block<br />

(UMB) by memory managers. The area from E0000‐EBFFF is currently<br />

not used by the BIOS and is available for use as UMB by memory<br />

managers. Parts of this area may be used by future versions of the BIOS<br />

to add i<strong>ncr</strong>eased functionality.<br />

Address Range (hex) Size Description<br />

FECFF000‐FECFF01B 27<br />

LAN PXE ROM<br />

100000‐10000000 255 MB Extended memory<br />

F0000‐FFFFF 64 kB System BIOS<br />

EE000‐EFFFF 8 kB Main BIOS (available as UMB)<br />

ED000‐EDFFF 4 kB ESCD (plug and play configuration<br />

EC000‐ECFFF 4 kB OEM (available as UMB)<br />

E0000‐EBFFF 48 kB BIOS Reserved (currently available<br />

D0000‐DFFFF 64 kB Available HI DOS memory<br />

CE000‐CFFFF 8 kB Flash Disk (optional)<br />

CC000‐CDFFF 8 kB NCR Trigantor MSR (optional)<br />

C8000‐CBFFF 16 kB Available HI DOS memory<br />

A0000‐C7FFF 160 kB Video memory and BIOS<br />

9FC00‐9FFFF 1 kB Extended BIOS <strong>Data</strong> (moveable by<br />

80000‐9FBFF 127 kB Extended conventional<br />

00000‐7FFFF 512 kB Conventional


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

Introduction<br />

This chapter discusses procedures how to recover the Operating System<br />

using the integrated or parallel CD‐ROM drive. The software is<br />

distributed on bootable CD‐ROM media. The drivers necessary to run<br />

the CD‐ROM are temporarily installed during boot.<br />

It is also possible to perform a BIOS update using a network connection.<br />

Refer to the NCR FitClient Software Userʹs Guide for information about<br />

that procedure.<br />

Prerequisites<br />

The following are required on the <strong>7401</strong> to perform an OS recovery using<br />

a CD:<br />

• Bootable CD‐ROM drive<br />

− Integrated <strong>7401</strong>‐F058/F059<br />

− External 2336‐K007 (Parallel CD‐ROM – Series 5 or Series 6)<br />

• The terminal BIOS must be 1.02.00.00 or greater.<br />

− MicroSolutions BackPack CD‐ROM Series 6 requires BIOS<br />

2.1.1.1 or greater<br />

• Keyboard<br />

When performing an OS recovery from a larger source image (larger<br />

disk) to a smaller destination disk you must use the special procedure<br />

described in the OS Recovery from a Larger Disk Image section that<br />

follows.


6-2 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

<strong>7401</strong>-22xx/35xx Prerequisite<br />

On terminals equipped with Pentium III/Celeron processors you must<br />

release memory resources to permit CD‐ROM access. Refer to the Setup<br />

chapter and make the following changes to the BIOS settings (Setup<br />

Utility).<br />

• Reset BIOS to Default settings<br />

• Set the On‐Board Intel PXE to Disabled<br />

External CD-ROM<br />

If you do not have an integrated CD‐ROM drive, connect the external<br />

CD‐ROM as follows.<br />

1. Connect the external CD‐ROM (2336‐K007) drive to the parallel port<br />

on the terminal.<br />

2. Connect the opposite end of the CD‐ROM cable (end with the<br />

power connector pigtail) to the CD‐ROM drive parallel connector.<br />

Parallel Connector<br />

Power<br />

Connector<br />

Parallel Connector<br />

18250


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-3<br />

Updating Procedures<br />

1. Apply power to the terminal so the CD‐ROM drive can be opened.<br />

2. Insert the CD that contains the operating system image.<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Model Software CD LPINs<br />

Win2000 WinXPe WinNT Win98<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐21xx, 31xx Not Supported Not Supported D370‐0433‐0100 D370‐0444‐0100 *<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐22xx, 25xx,<br />

32xx, 35xx<br />

D370‐0504‐0100 D370‐0485‐0100 D370‐0483‐0100 D370‐0481‐0100 *<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐26xx D370‐0484‐0100 D370‐0567‐0100 D370‐0483‐0100 Not Supported<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐45xx D370‐0554‐0100 Not Supported D370‐0553‐0100 Not Supported<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐46xx D370‐0484‐0100 D370‐0567‐0100 D370‐0553‐0100 Not Supported<br />

* Support for Windows 98 has been discontinued.<br />

3. Boot the terminal.<br />

4. Press F2 at the screen prompt to enter the Setup Utility.<br />

5. In the Advanced menu, select I/O Device Configuration.<br />

6. Verify that LPT 1 Mode is set to ECP.<br />

7. Go back to the Advanced menu, select Multiple ROM Menu.<br />

8. Set the Parallel CD-ROM Boot to Enabled.<br />

9. Exit Setup and Save Changes.<br />

As the terminal reboots, you should see a message during boot<br />

indicating that the CD‐ROM has been recognized:<br />

Micro Solutions BACKPACK CD-ROM v0.3<br />

. . .<br />

Booting from BACKPACK CD<br />

Starting MS-DOS


6-4 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

10. Follow the DOS screen prompts. After each entry you are asked to<br />

confirm your input. You can use 1 or y for Yes, 2 or n for No.<br />

11. Enter whether or not you want to perform Disk verification.<br />

(Answering Yes takes twice as long, but is recommended.)<br />

If Yes is selected:<br />

• The Ghost software verifies write operations and handles bad<br />

FAT clusters.<br />

• The Ghost error file (GHOST.ERR) is displayed before rebooting<br />

If No is selected:<br />

• The Ghost error file is displayed before rebooting only if Ghost<br />

aborts.<br />

Caution: If the error file is displayed, the batch file pauses for<br />

user input before rebooting. You may use Ctrl‐C to cancel out of<br />

the batch file if you want to see the error file again, but nothing<br />

should be done that writes to the hard disk before rebooting.<br />

GHOST.ERR is on the RAM disk and is lost on reboot.<br />

12. Select which type of recovery you want to perform from the next<br />

menu (normally option #1).<br />

1) Redo entire disk with the first partition the same size.<br />

2) Redo the first OS partition.<br />

3) Redo the second OS partition.<br />

The Ghost software then begins the disk recovery from the CD. It<br />

displays a progress bar and gives you an estimate how long the<br />

process should take.<br />

When the recovery process is completed, the client hard disk is<br />

restored to its preinstalled condition, as originally received from the<br />

factory.<br />

13. At the completion of the recovery process remove the CD and press<br />

Enter to reboot the terminal.


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-5<br />

14. Enter Setup when the terminal reboots and reset the Parallel CD-<br />

ROM Boot to Disabled.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win2000)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most of<br />

the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk image.<br />

Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. After the terminal reboots, it will perform a disk check and then<br />

continue with the Windows 2000 installation.<br />

2. Enter the User Name and Organization.<br />

3. Enter the Computer Name for the client.<br />

4. Enter the Administrator’s Account Password (optional)<br />

5. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the client.<br />

6. Login when prompted.<br />

7. Run the MicroTouch screen calibration from the Desktop icon.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinXPe)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most of<br />

the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk image.<br />

Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. Click the Admin button to login as Administrator.<br />

2. Read the EULA (End‐User License Agreement) information in the<br />

DOS window, then type EXIT and press Enter to close the DOS<br />

window.<br />

3. Start the Network Setup Wizard.<br />

4. Select options to identify the network information for the terminal<br />

environment.


6-6 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

5. Enter the Computer Description.<br />

6. Enter the Computer Name.<br />

7. Enter the Workgroup Name.<br />

8. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the terminal.<br />

9. Log in when prompted.<br />

10. Open the Control Panel or use the TouchWare Icon on the desktop<br />

and run the MicroTouch screen calibration.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinNT)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most of<br />

the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk image.<br />

Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. After the terminal reboots, press Next at the Windows Setup screen.<br />

2. Accept the Microsoft license agreement.<br />

3. Enter the User Name and Organization.<br />

4. Enter the Computer Name for the client.<br />

5. Enter the Administrator’s Account Password (optional)<br />

6. When prompted, press Finish to reboot the client.<br />

7. Log in when prompted.<br />

8. Open the Control Panel and run the MicroTouch screen calibration.<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win98) – (Discontinued)<br />

The system automatically reboots when the image recovery is complete<br />

and starts the software installation. This installation also installs most of<br />

the additional software and drivers that are included in the disk image.<br />

Complete the installation as follows.<br />

1. When the terminal boots it enters the Windows setup routine.


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-7<br />

Note: When installing Win98 on terminals with Processor Boards<br />

(<strong>7401</strong>‐21xx/31xx) there are few differences in the procedure as<br />

follows:<br />

a) The terminal starts the Add New <strong>Har</strong>dware Wizard.<br />

b) For each device found, permit Windows to search for new<br />

drivers (take defaults).<br />

c) After each driver is installed you are asked to reboot. Answer<br />

No.<br />

2. At the User Information screen, enter the User information. This<br />

can be done using a keyboard or you can use the touch screen<br />

keyboard. After entering the information, press Enter or touch OK.<br />

3. Go into the Control Panel and set the terminal Date and Time.<br />

4. In the Control Panel, run the MicroTouch screen calibration.


6-8 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

Gold Disk Contents<br />

This section describes the contents of each of the Gold Disk Images,<br />

including all the additions and changes that were made on top of the<br />

generic operating system.<br />

For each operating system, NCR strongly recommends that the drivers<br />

placed in the c:\install directory be left there for the purposes of<br />

servicing and maintaining the system. If you are using the information<br />

in this section to build your own operating system image and not using<br />

NCRʹs provided OS Recovery image as a base image, then we<br />

recommend that all installed drivers be placed in a similar<br />

c:\install directory for support.<br />

Microsoft Operating System License Agreements<br />

When purchasing a workstation or kiosk preloaded with a Microsoft<br />

operating system, the application provider must follow certain license<br />

agreement guidelines. Listed below are some of the major points of<br />

Microsoft’s “Embedded Software” agreement, which currently covers<br />

DOS, Win 3.11, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows<br />

2000, and Windows XPe.<br />

• The end user application should not permit the user (typically a<br />

cashier) to exit the application so that they may be able to browse<br />

the operating system desktop, explorer, or other Microsoft<br />

operating system user interface elements. This does not apply to<br />

servicing, upgrading, or diagnosing problems for the workstation<br />

by services or field engineers. This restriction is meant to ensure<br />

that the end user is only permitted to navigate within the confines<br />

of the end user’s application under normal operating conditions.<br />

• The NCR OS Recovery image can only be used to recover or update<br />

systems with licenses procured from NCR.


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-9<br />

Operating System Restrictions<br />

The following section describes restrictions for operating systems used<br />

with the <strong>7401</strong> terminal.<br />

Standby and Hibernate Mode Restriction<br />

When using a <strong>7401</strong> terminal without a keyboard or mouse, the<br />

Windows 2000, Windows XP PRO, and Windows XP Embedded OS<br />

Standby Mode and Hibernate Mode should be avoided. These two modes<br />

place the hardware in a low power state that requires an interrupt to<br />

restart the processor.<br />

The Windows 2000 and Windows XP Embedded Gold Disk Images<br />

disable Hibernate Mode and Standby Mode on the 7454 terminal. These<br />

two modes should not be used without a keyboard or mouse.<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx Win2000 Operating System Recovery<br />

Software (Version 02.03.00.01)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0504‐0100)<br />

This product should only be used on <strong>7401</strong> terminals with a Microsoft<br />

Windows 2000 license.<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx Windows 2000 Operating System Recovery<br />

Software provides the means of restoring the operating system to the<br />

hard disk of a <strong>7401</strong> terminal. The bootstrap program (di_intel.bsd) and<br />

disk recovery boot image (di_intel.bid) are downloaded to the target<br />

terminal over the network and restore the hard disk to the preinstalled<br />

state as shipped from the factory. The following software is installed:<br />

• Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional with Service Pack 2<br />

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 (version 5.50.4134.0600)<br />

• SMI Lynx EM/EM+ Video driver (version 5.0.2195.178)<br />

• SoundFusion Audio driver (version 5.12.01.3041)


6-10 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

• Intel 82559 Ethernet LAN drivers (version 5.0.67.0)<br />

• MicroTouch driver (version 5.62)<br />

• NCRSYSM driver (version 2,02,01,002)<br />

• Windows Installer (version 1.1)<br />

The following drivers are not installed automatically, but can be<br />

installed from their respective locations:<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM (3.02) C:\Install\Drivers\CDRom<br />

• Edgeport USB (1.15.02) C:\Install\Drivers\USB<br />

Configures the following settings/revisions:<br />

• Preinstalls W2K to include the Product ID Number (PID)<br />

• Places the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Release in Registry under:<br />

HKey-Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Runs Sysprep, using sysprep.inf and sysprep.bat, so that the mini<br />

installation will run on initial boot with the following parameters:<br />

− Skip EULA<br />

− Automatically include PID<br />

• Establishes a FAT32 primary system partition that fills the entire<br />

drive<br />

• Includes necessary OS cab files in C:\Install<br />

• Installs SP1 and SP2<br />

• Installs SMI Control Panel<br />

• Installs Intel Proset utility<br />

• Enables APM<br />

• Sets ʹAPM monitor shutoffʹ to ʹNeverʹ<br />

• Enables PME (in Intel Proset utility) set to ʹ<strong>Har</strong>dware Defaultʹ<br />

• Enables DMA<br />

• Sets color to 16 bit


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-11<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-26xx/46xx Win2000 Operating System Recovery Software<br />

(Version 02.05.00.02)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0484‐0100)<br />

This product should only be used on <strong>7401</strong> terminals with a Microsoft<br />

Windows 2000 license.<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx Windows 2000 Operating System Recovery Software<br />

provides the means of restoring the operating system to the hard disk of<br />

a <strong>7401</strong> terminal that has a Summa II processor board with ACPI BIOS.<br />

The bootstrap program (di_intel.bsd) and disk recovery boot image<br />

(di_intel.bid) are downloaded to the target terminal over the network<br />

and restore the hard disk to the preinstalled state as shipped from the<br />

factory. The following software is installed:<br />

• Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional with Service Pack 2<br />

• Microsoft Security Rollup Package (W2KSRP1)<br />

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 (6.0.2800.1106 SP1)<br />

• SMI Lynx 3DM/3DM+ Video driver (version 5.0.2195.178)<br />

• ESS Allegro Audio (5.12.1.1167)<br />

• Intel 82559 Ethernet LAN drivers (version 5.0.67.0)<br />

• MicroTouch driver (version 5.63 SR3)<br />

• NCRSYSM installed (3.0.4.12) – Minimum required for ACPI<br />

support<br />

• Windows Installer (version 2.0)<br />

• ATX Printer driver (1.03)


6-12 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

The following drivers are not installed automatically, but can be<br />

installed from their respective locations:<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM (3.02) C:\Install\Drivers\CDRom<br />

• Magtec MCR (1.01.07) C:\Install\Drivers\MCR<br />

• USB Camera (2.15) C:\Install\Drivers\Camera<br />

• Edgeport USB (2.15) C:\Install\Drivers\USB<br />

Configures the following settings/revisions:<br />

• Preinstalls W2K to include the Product ID Number (PID)<br />

• Places the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Release in Registry under:<br />

HKey-Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Runs Sysprep, using sysprep.inf and sysprep.bat, so that the mini<br />

installation will run on initial boot with the following parameters:<br />

−<br />

Automatically include PID<br />

• Establishes a FAT32 primary system partition that fills the entire<br />

drive<br />

• Includes necessary OS cab files in C:\Install<br />

• Installs SMI Control Panel (4.3.5)<br />

• Installs Intel Proset utility<br />

• Enables PME (in Intel Proset utility) set to ʹ<strong>Har</strong>dware Defaultʹ<br />

• Enables DMA (DMACheck.exe provided in C:\Install)<br />

• Sets Resolution to 800x600, color to High<br />

• Makes PinPad testing folder available in C:\Install\Drivers\PinPad<br />

• Replaces the standard EULA with the NCR‐specific EULA<br />

• Installs MS SNMP, set to Manual


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-13<br />

• Addresses hotplug keyboard issue, registry values added:<br />

KLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\i8042prt\Parameters<br />

• Value: Headless<br />

• Type: REG_DWORD<br />

• <strong>Data</strong>: 0x1<br />

• Runs TerminalCheck.exe in Run registry to determine correct<br />

hardware platform (otherwise it will shut down)<br />

• Hides MS splash screen by adding /noguiboot parameter to boot.ini


6-14 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-45xx Win2000 Operating System Recovery Software<br />

(Version 02.04.00.02)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0554‐0100)<br />

This product should only be used on <strong>7401</strong> terminals with a Microsoft<br />

Windows 2000 license.<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐45xx Windows 2000 Operating System Recovery Software<br />

provides the means of restoring the operating system to the hard disk of<br />

a <strong>7401</strong> terminal. The bootstrap program (di_intel.bsd) and disk<br />

recovery boot image (di_intel.bid) are downloaded to the target<br />

terminal over the network and restore the hard disk to the preinstalled<br />

state as shipped from the factory. The following software is installed:<br />

• Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional with Service Pack 2<br />

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 (version 5.50.4134.0600)<br />

• SMI Lynx EM/EM+ Video driver (version 5.0.2195.178)<br />

• SoundFusion Audio driver (version 5.12.01.3041)<br />

• Intel 82559 Ethernet LAN drivers (version 5.0.67.0)<br />

• MicroTouch driver (version 5.63)<br />

• NCRSYSM installed (3.0.1.9)<br />

• Windows Installer (version 1.1)<br />

• ATX Printer installed (1.05)<br />

• MagTec magnetic card reader installed (1.01.07)<br />

• Sun JVM installed (1.3.1_01)


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-15<br />

The following drivers are not installed automatically, but can be<br />

installed from their respective locations:<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM (3.02) C:\Install\Drivers\CDRom<br />

• Edgeport USB (1.15.2) C:\Install\Drivers\USB<br />

Configures the following settings/revisions:<br />

• Preinstalls W2K to include the Product ID Number (PID)<br />

• Places the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Release in Registry under:<br />

HKey-Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Runs Sysprep, using sysprep.inf and sysprep.bat, so that the mini<br />

installation will run on initial boot with the following parameters:<br />

−<br />

Automatically include PID<br />

• Establishes a FAT32 primary system partition that fills the entire<br />

drive<br />

• Includes necessary OS cab files in C:\Install<br />

• Installs SP1 and SP2<br />

• Installs SMI Control Panel<br />

• Installs Intel Proset utility<br />

• Enables APM<br />

• Sets APM monitor shutoffʹ to ‘Never’<br />

• Enables PME (in Intel Proset utility) set to ʹ<strong>Har</strong>dware Defaultʹ<br />

• Enables DMA<br />

• Sets color to 16 bit<br />

• Makes PinPad testing folder available in C:\Install\Drivers\PinPad<br />

• Changes audio hardware acceleration from ‘standard’ to ‘emulation<br />

only’


6-16 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

• Replaces the standard EULA with the NCR‐specific EULA<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx WinXPe Operating System Recovery<br />

Software (Version 02.05.00.01)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0485‐0100)<br />

This product should only be used on <strong>7401</strong> terminals with a Microsoft<br />

Windows XPe license.<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx Windows XPe Operating System Recovery<br />

Software provides the means of restoring the operating system to the<br />

hard disk of a <strong>7401</strong> POS terminal. The bootstrap program (di_intel.bsd)<br />

and disk recovery boot image (di_intel.bid) are downloaded to the<br />

target terminal over the network and restore the hard disk to the<br />

preinstalled state as shipped from the factory. This enables installation<br />

of the following software:<br />

• Microsoft Windows XPe w/ SP1<br />

• SMI Lynx 3DM/3DM+ Video driver (6.13.10.227)<br />

• Intel 82559 Ethernet LAN drivers (6.01.03.0000)<br />

• NCRSYSM driver (3.0.4.12)<br />

• MicroTouch drivers (5.64)<br />

The following drivers are not installed automatically, but can be<br />

installed from their respective locations (Readme files exist in these<br />

locations, as well):<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM (4.0.100.1190) C:\Install\Drivers\CDRom<br />

• Edgeport USB (2.20) C:\Install\Drivers\USB<br />

• Inside Out Networks<br />

Watchport/V Camera (2.20)<br />

C:\Install\Drivers\Camera


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-17<br />

Furthermore, the following settings/revisions have been configured:<br />

• Preinstalled XPe to include the Product ID Number (PID)<br />

• Placed the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Release in Registry under:<br />

HKey‐Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Established a NFTS primary system partition that fills the entire<br />

drive<br />

• Included necessary OS cab files in C:\Install<br />

• Installed SMI Control Panel (4.2.2)<br />

• Installed Intel Proset utility<br />

• Set virtual memory to 128<br />

• Enabled APM<br />

• Set ‘APM monitor shutoff’ to ‘Never’<br />

• Set ‘Enable PME’ (in Intel Proset utility) to ‘<strong>Har</strong>dware Default’<br />

• Set color to 24 bit<br />

• Added SetResolution.exe to RunOnce registry.<br />

• Added NCR‐specific EULA.


6-18 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-26xx/46xx WinXPe Operating System Recovery Software<br />

(Version 02.05.00.01)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0567‐0100)<br />

This product should only be used on <strong>7401</strong> terminals with a Microsoft<br />

Windows XPe license.<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx Windows XPe Operating System Recovery Software<br />

provides the means of restoring the operating system to the hard disk of<br />

a <strong>7401</strong> POS terminal. The bootstrap program (di_intel.bsd) and disk<br />

recovery boot image (di_intel.bid) are downloaded to the target<br />

terminal over the network and restore the hard disk to the preinstalled<br />

state as shipped from the factory. This enables installation of the<br />

following software:<br />

• Microsoft Windows XPe w/ SP1<br />

• SMI Lynx 3DM/3DM+ Video driver (6.13.10.227)<br />

• Intel 82559 Ethernet LAN drivers (6.01.03.0000)<br />

• NCRSYSM driver (3.0.4.12)<br />

• MicroTouch drivers (5.64)<br />

• Edgeport USB driver (2.20)<br />

• Practical Automation ATX 38 Printer driver (V1.04)<br />

The following drivers are not installed automatically, but can be<br />

installed from their respective locations (Readme files exist in these<br />

locations, as well):<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM (4.0.100.1190) C:\Install\Drivers\CDRom<br />

• HyperCom available (V4.9.0) C:\Install\Drivers\HperCom<br />

• Inside Out Networks<br />

Watchport/V Camera (2.20)<br />

C:\Install\Drivers\Camera<br />

• Magtec MCR (1.01.07) C:\Install\Drivers\MagTek


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-19<br />

Furthermore, the following settings/revisions have been configured:<br />

• Preinstalled XPe to include the Product ID Number (PID)<br />

• Placed the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Release in Registry under:<br />

HKey‐Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Established a NFTS primary system partition that fills the entire<br />

drive<br />

• Included necessary OS cab files in C:\Install<br />

• Installed SMI Control Panel (4.2.2)<br />

• Installed Intel Proset utility<br />

• Set virtual memory to 128<br />

• Enabled APM<br />

• Set ‘APM monitor shutoff’ to ‘Never’<br />

• Set ‘Enable PME’ (in Intel Proset utility) to ‘<strong>Har</strong>dware Default’<br />

• Set color to 24 bit<br />

• Added SetResolution.exe to RunOnce registry.<br />

• Added NCR‐specific EULA.


6-20 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-/22xx/25xx/26xx/32xx/35xx NT Operating System<br />

Recovery Software (Version 02.05.00.02)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0483‐0100)<br />

This product should only be used on <strong>7401</strong> terminals with a Microsoft<br />

Windows NT Workstation 4.0 license.<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐22xx/25xx/26xx/32xx/35xx NT Operating System Recovery<br />

Software provides the means of restoring the operating system to the<br />

hard disk of a <strong>7401</strong> terminal that has either a Summa or Summa II<br />

processor board. The bootstrap program (di_intel.bsd) and disk<br />

recovery boot image (di_intel.bid) are downloaded to the target<br />

terminal over the network and restore the hard disk to the preinstalled<br />

state as shipped from the factory. The following software is installed:<br />

• Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 with Service Pack 6a<br />

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 (6.0.2800.1106 SP1)<br />

• MicroTouch drivers (5.63 SR3)<br />

• SMI Lynx 3DM Video driver (4.00.1381.0178)<br />

• SoundFusion Audio driver (4.01.2086)<br />

• ESS Allegro Audio (4.03.00.3077)<br />

• Intel 82559 Ethernet LAN drivers (5.00.66.0000)<br />

• NCRSYSM driver (3.0.4.12)<br />

• Windows Installer (2.0)<br />

The following drivers are not installed automatically, but can be<br />

installed from their respective locations:<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM (2.04) C:\Install\Drivers\CDRom<br />

• Edgeport USB (2.15) C:\Install\Drivers\USB<br />

• USB Camera (2.15) C:\Install\Drivers\Camera<br />

Configures the following settings/revisions:


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-21<br />

• Preinstalls NT to include the Product ID Number (PID)<br />

• Places the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Release in Registry under:<br />

HKey-Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Runs Sysprep (so that the mini installation will run on initial boot)<br />

with the following parameters:<br />

−<br />

Automatically include PID<br />

• Host.cmd set in RunOnce to update the registry<br />

• Establishes a 2gb FAT16 primary system partition<br />

• Establishes a secondary NTFS partition that fills the remainder of<br />

the drive<br />

• Includes necessary OS cab files in C:\Install<br />

• Makes SP6a folder available in C:\Install (installed)<br />

• Installs SMI Control Panel (4.3.5)<br />

• Installs Intel Proset utility<br />

• ʹEnable PMEʹ (in Intel Proset utility) set to ʹ<strong>Har</strong>dware Defaultʹ<br />

• Replaces the standard EULA with the NCR‐specific EULA<br />

• Installs MS SNMP, set to Manual<br />

• Disables SoundFusion Audio drivers in Devices Startup<br />

• Disables ESS Audio Drivers<br />

• Runs TerminalCheck.exe in Run registry to determine correct<br />

hardware platform (otherwise it will shut down)<br />

• Runs EnableAudioDriver.exe in Run registry to enable the<br />

appropriate sound driver (SoundFusion or ESS)<br />

• Enables DMA (DMACheck.exe provided in C:\Install)<br />

• Hides MS splash screen by adding /noguiboot parameter to boot.ini<br />

• Mutes Volume Line‐In


6-22 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-21xx/31xx NT Operating System Recovery Software<br />

(Version 01.04.01.00)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0433‐0100)<br />

Installs the following software:<br />

• Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 with Service Pack 4a.<br />

Service Pack 6 included (but not installed) on the disk<br />

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0<br />

• MicroTouch TouchWare Version 5.4 for Mouse Port software<br />

• Chips & Technologies 69000 Video driver<br />

• CrystalWare Audio driver<br />

• Intel EtherExpress software<br />

• Intel PIIX Bus Master IDE drivers<br />

• M‐Systems Disk‐On‐Chip 2000 driver (not installed) available<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM drivers (not installed) available<br />

Configures the following settings/revisions:<br />

• Enables the NT Dump settings to:<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

−<br />

send an administrative alert<br />

write dump to file<br />

overwrite existing file<br />

auto reboot after dump<br />

• Mutes the Volume Line‐In<br />

• Changes event log to overwrite events as needed for the Application<br />

Type event logs<br />

• Changes the Windows Scroll Bar Size from 16 to 18 pixels for easier<br />

Touch response


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-23<br />

• Sysprep.inf answer file created to:<br />

− Skip EULA<br />

− Preinstall the Product ID Number (PID)<br />

• Places the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Version in Registry under:<br />

HKey-Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Windows Installer (Version 1.1) installed<br />

• Removes the following key from the registry (as a current COM9<br />

issue workaround):<br />

Hkey_Local_Machine\System\CurrentControlSet\Servic<br />

es\Serial\Parameters\ Serial 10999<br />

• Changes page file size to 139‐256


6-24 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-4xxx NT Operating System Recovery Software<br />

(Version 02.05.00.02)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0553‐0100)<br />

This product should only be used on <strong>7401</strong> terminals with a Microsoft<br />

Windows NT Workstation 4.0 license.<br />

The <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx NT Operating System Recovery Software provides the<br />

means of restoring the operating system to the hard disk of a <strong>7401</strong>‐45xx<br />

terminal that has a Summa processor board or s <strong>7401</strong>‐46xx terminal that<br />

has Summa II processor board. The bootstrap program (di_intel.bsd)<br />

and disk recovery boot image (di_intel.bid) are downloaded to the<br />

target terminal over the network and restore the hard disk to the<br />

preinstalled state as shipped from the factory. The following software is<br />

installed:<br />

• Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 with Service Pack 6a<br />

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1 (6.0.2800.1106 SP1)<br />

• SMI Lynx 3DM Video (4.00.1381.0178)<br />

• SoundFusion Audio (4.01.2086)<br />

• ESS Allegro Audio (4.03.00.3077)<br />

• Intel 82559 Ethernet LAN (5.00.66.0000)<br />

• NCRSYSM (3.0.4.12)<br />

• Windows Installer (2.0)<br />

• MicroTouch (5.63 SR3)<br />

• ATX Printer (1.05)<br />

The following drivers are not installed automatically, but can be<br />

installed from their respective locations:<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM (2.04) C:\Install\Drivers\CDRom<br />

• Edgeport USB (2.15) C:\Install\Drivers\USB<br />

• Magtec MCR ((1.01.07) C:\Install\Drivers\Magtec<br />

• USB Camera (2.15) C:\Install\Drivers\Camera


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-25<br />

Configures the following settings/revisions:<br />

• Preinstalls NT to include the Product ID Number (PID)<br />

• Places the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Release in Registry under:<br />

HKey-Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Runs Sysprep (so that the mini installation will run on initial boot)<br />

with the following parameters:<br />

−<br />

Automatically include PID<br />

• Host.cmd set in RunOnce to update the registry<br />

• Establishes a 2gb FAT16 primary system partition<br />

• Establishes a secondary NTFS partition that fills the remainder of<br />

the drive<br />

• Includes necessary OS cab files in C:\Install<br />

• Makes SP6a folder available in C:\Install (installed)<br />

• Installs SMI Control Panel (4.3.5)<br />

• Installs Intel Proset utility<br />

• ʹEnable PMEʹ (in Intel Proset utility) set to ʹ<strong>Har</strong>dware Defaultʹ<br />

• Makes PinPad testing folder available in C:\Install\Drivers\PinPad<br />

• Replaces the standard EULA with the NCR‐specific EULA.<br />

• Installs MS SNMP, set to Manual<br />

• Disables SoundFusion Audio drivers in Devices Startup<br />

• Disables ESS Audio drivers<br />

• Runs TerminalCheck.exe in Run registry to determine correct<br />

hardware platform (otherwise it will shut down)<br />

• Runs EnableAudioDriver.exe in Run registry to enable the<br />

appropriate sound driver (SoundFusion or ESS)<br />

• Enables DMA (DMACheck.exe provided in C:\Install)<br />

• Hides MS splash screen by adding /noguiboot parameter to boot.ini<br />

• Starts SerMouse device so trackball works properly


6-26 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx Win98 Operating System Recovery<br />

Software (Version 02.03.00.01)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0481‐0100)<br />

Support for Windows 98 has been discontinued. This product should only<br />

be used on <strong>7401</strong> terminals with a Microsoft Windows 98 license.<br />

<strong>7401</strong> 22xx/25xx/32xx/35xx Win98 Operating System Recovery Software<br />

provides the means of restoring the operating system to the hard disk of<br />

a <strong>7401</strong> terminal. The bootstrap program (di_intel.bsd) and disk<br />

recovery boot image (di_intel.bid) are downloaded to the target<br />

terminal over the network and restore the hard disk to the preinstalled<br />

state as shipped from the factory. The following software is installed:<br />

• Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition<br />

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 (version 5.50.4134.0600)<br />

• MicroTouch driver (version 5.62)<br />

• SMI Lynx 3DM Video driver (version 4.12.01.0034)<br />

• SoundFusion Audio driver (version 4.12.01.0034)<br />

• Intel 82559 Ethernet LAN drivers (version 5.00.67.0000)<br />

• NCRSYSM driver (version 2.01.01.004)<br />

• Windows Installer (version 1.1)<br />

The following drivers are not installed automatically, but can be<br />

installed from their respective locations (Readme files exist in these<br />

locations, as well):<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM (3.04) C:\Install\Drivers\CDRom<br />

• Edgeport USB (1.15.2) C:\Install\Drivers\USB<br />

Configures the following settings/revisions:<br />

• Preinstalls Win98 to include the Product ID Number (PID)


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-27<br />

• Places the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Release in Registry under:<br />

HKey-Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive<br />

• Adds Userinfo.exe to Start Menu to capture User Name, User<br />

Organization, Computer Name, and Workgroup (once the user has<br />

entered this information, userinfo will remove itself from the Start<br />

Menu)<br />

• Establishes a FAT32 primary system partition that fills the entire<br />

drive<br />

• Includes necessary OS cab files in C:\Install<br />

• Installs Intel Proset Utility<br />

• Applies a Microsoft hotfix to replace usbhub.sys version 4.10.2222<br />

with 4.10.2223; this executable has been placed in<br />

C:\Install\Drivers\USB\Hotfix<br />

• Enables DMA<br />

• Disables DSound Acceleration and Sensaura/EAX in the<br />

SoundFusion control panel<br />

• Disables game device and joystick<br />

• Sets to High Color<br />

• Enables PME (in Intel Proset utility) set to ʹ<strong>Har</strong>dware Defaultʹ<br />

• Mutes the Volume Line‐In


6-28 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>-21xx/31xx Win98 Operating System Recovery Software<br />

(Version 01.01.00.00)<br />

(LPIN: D370‐0444‐0100)<br />

Support for Windows 98 has been discontinued.<br />

Installs the following software:<br />

• Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition<br />

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0<br />

• MicroTouch TouchWare Version 5.4 for Mouse Port software<br />

• Chips & Technologies 69000 Video driver<br />

• Crystal Audio driver<br />

• Intel 8255x‐based PCI Ethernet Adapter<br />

• Intel PIIX Bus Master IDE drivers<br />

• Windows Installer (Version 1.1)<br />

• Backpack CD‐ROM drivers available (not installed)<br />

Configures the following settings/revisions:<br />

• Mutes the Volume Line‐In<br />

• Places the Gold Drive Part Number, Date Created, LPIN, and<br />

Version in Registry under:<br />

HKey-Local_Machine\Software\NCR\Gold Drive


Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery 6-29<br />

OS Recovery from a Larger Disk Image<br />

The following procedure should be used to restore an Operating<br />

System when the destination disk is smaller than the source image (i.e.<br />

OS Recovery was made on a 10 GB source disk, but is being recovered<br />

on a 4.3 GB drive).<br />

1. Boot the system.<br />

You should see a message during boot indicating that the CD‐ROM<br />

has been recognized:<br />

Micro Solutions BACKPACK CD-ROM v0.3<br />

. . .<br />

Booting from BACKPACK CD<br />

Starting MS-DOS<br />

2. Follow the DOS screen prompts. After each entry, you are asked to<br />

confirm your input. You can use 1 or y for Yes, 2 or n for No.<br />

3. Enter No at the Disk verification question.<br />

4. Select which type of recovery you want to perform from the next<br />

menu (normally option #1).<br />

1) Redo entire disk with the first partition the same size.<br />

2) Redo the first OS partition.<br />

3) Redo the second OS partition.<br />

5. At the Press any key to continue dialog box, press [CTRL]-C to abort<br />

the process. When asked Terminate batch job?<br />

Answer Y.<br />

6. From the command prompt, change to drive Z, which is the location<br />

of the Ghost software (CD‐ROM drive).<br />

7. Run the Ghost command.<br />

Ghost.exe<br />

8. Press Enter.


6-30 Chapter 6: Operating System Recovery<br />

9. Select Local → Disk → From Image and press Enter.<br />

10. The directory that Ghost is now looking in should be Z: (if not,<br />

switch to Z). Select the File name to load image from file<br />

(nnnnnnn.gho) and press Enter.<br />

11. Select the Local destination drive and press Enter.<br />

12. Set the sizes of the primary and secondary partitions as follows.<br />

O/S Primary Partition/ Format Secondary Partition Size<br />

DOS 2 GB/FAT16 2 GB/FAT16<br />

Win95 2 GB/FAT16 Fill remainder as FAT 32<br />

WinNT 2 GB/FAT16 Fill remainder as NTFS<br />

Win98 Single FAT 32 partition N/A<br />

Win2000 Single FAT 32 partition N/A<br />

WinXPe Single NTFS partition N/A<br />

In order to do this you may need to clear the amount from the<br />

second partition.<br />

13. Press Enter.<br />

14. If you are recovering from Win9x, it is likely that the second<br />

partition will be too small for FAT32. If so, a dialog is displayed<br />

Converting partition from FAT32 to FAT, proceed?<br />

Choose Yes.<br />

15. At the next dialog box,<br />

Proceed with disk load? Destination drive will be<br />

permanently overwritten,<br />

Choose Yes to start the recovery process.


Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures<br />

Introduction<br />

The terminalʹs BIOS can be updated using a parallel CD‐ROM drive<br />

and software available on bootable CD‐ROM media. The drivers<br />

necessary to run the CD‐ROM are temporarily installed during boot.<br />

This chapter describes this procedure.<br />

It is also possible to perform a BIOS update using a network<br />

connection. Refer to the NCR FitClient Software Userʹs Guide for<br />

information about that procedure.<br />

Crisis Recovery<br />

In the event the BIOS becomes corrupt, such as the result of a power<br />

failure during the BIOS Update procedure, you can use the method<br />

discussed later in this chapter in the BIOS Crisis Recovery section to<br />

recover the BIOS.<br />

Prerequisites<br />

The following are required on the <strong>7401</strong> in order to perform a BIOS<br />

update using a CD.<br />

• Bootable CD‐ROM drive<br />

− Integrated <strong>7401</strong>‐F058/F059<br />

− External 2336‐K007 (Parallel CD‐ROM – Series 5 or Series 6)<br />

• The terminal BIOS must be 1.02.00.00 or greater.<br />

− MicroSolutions BackPack CD‐ROM Series 6 requires BIOS<br />

2.1.1.1 or greater<br />

• Keyboard<br />

• NCR BIOS and BIOS Update Software<br />

(LPIN: A370‐0022‐0100)


7-2 Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures<br />

Updating Procedures<br />

External CD-ROM<br />

If you do not have an integrated CD‐ROM drive, connect the Backpack<br />

External CD‐ROM as follows.<br />

1. Connect the external CD‐ROM (2336‐K007) drive to the parallel<br />

port on the terminal.<br />

2. Connect the power connector to the CD‐ROM drive.<br />

Parallel Connector<br />

Power<br />

Connector<br />

Parallel Connector<br />

18250


Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures 7-3<br />

3. Apply power to the terminal so the CD‐ROM drive can be opened.<br />

4. Insert the BIOS update CD.<br />

NCR BIOS and BIOS Update Software<br />

LPIN: A370‐0022‐0100<br />

5. Boot the terminal.<br />

6. Press F2 at the screen prompt to enter the Setup Utility.<br />

7. In the Advanced menu, select I/O Device Configuration.<br />

8. Verify that LPT 1 Mode is set to ECP.<br />

9. Go back to the Advanced menu, select Multiple ROM Menu.<br />

10. Set the Parallel CD-ROM Boot to Enabled.<br />

11. Exit Setup and Save Changes.<br />

As the terminal reboots, you should see a message during boot<br />

indicating that the CD‐ROM has been recognized:<br />

Micro Solutions BACKPACK CD-ROM v0.3<br />

. . .<br />

Booting from BACKPACK CD<br />

Starting MS-DOS<br />

12. Follow the screen prompts on the client to update the BIOS. You<br />

can select two methods to run the update program.<br />

• Automatic BIOS Update – update process runs unattended<br />

Note: You will see a prompt for terminal model and serial<br />

number information if the program detects invalid information<br />

in the current BIOS, or if you are replacing the Processor Board,<br />

in which case there is not model/serial number information in<br />

the BIOS.<br />

Important: Model/Serial Number is mandatory for FitClient<br />

operation.<br />

• Interactive BIOS Update – permits you to input/replace the<br />

model/serial number information that is stored in the BIOS.


7-4 Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures<br />

Note: Model/Serial number data that is currently stored in the<br />

BIOS is displayed during power up.<br />

13. When you get the green window, this indicates a successful update.<br />

14. Remove the CD.<br />

15. Press any key to reboot.<br />

16. Enter Setup when the terminal reboots and load the Setup<br />

Defaults (Exit Menu).<br />

17. From the Advanced menu, select Reset Configuration <strong>Data</strong> and<br />

then use the space bar to change the selection to Yes.<br />

18. Exit Setup and Save Changes.<br />

19. Remove the CD during reboot for the OS to begin. When system is<br />

restored, reset the BIOS to normal defaults.


Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures 7-5<br />

BIOS Crisis Recovery<br />

The procedures below provide a way to restore the BIOS resulting<br />

from a non‐recoverable condition.<br />

Note: Use this BIOS crisis recovery procedure only for a<br />

NON‐RECOVERABLE BIOS failure. A non‐recoverable BIOS state<br />

typically results from power loss during a flash BIOS update process.<br />

This is a rare occurrence and should not be confused with other<br />

hardware errors that cause a no video state. This procedure is not<br />

intended to be used for changing or upgrading an operational BIOS.<br />

Required <strong>Har</strong>dware<br />

Part Number Part Name Use<br />

PC with at serial port<br />

497‐0408349 Cable, 9‐Pin Female to 9‐Pin<br />

Female RS232<br />

Download BIOS<br />

PC to terminal<br />

connection<br />

497‐0411000 Cable, Parallel Interface <strong>7401</strong> parallel port to<br />

Dongle connection<br />

497‐0413418 Parallel Dongle Forces BIOS recovery<br />

497‐0414184 POS Connector Board <strong>7401</strong> parallel port<br />

(not required if<br />

already present)<br />

Required Software<br />

Acquire the following software from NCR.<br />

NCR 74xx BIOS and BIOS Update Software<br />

LPIN: A370‐0022‐0100, Release 3.0 or later


7-6 Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures<br />

Recovery Procedures<br />

1. Connect the Parallel I/F Cable to the parallel (Customer Display)<br />

connector on the terminal.<br />

COM1 Parallel<br />

19518<br />

2. Connect the two machines with the RS‐232 cable. Use COM Port 1<br />

on both machines (COM1 is next to the USB ports on the terminal).<br />

RS-232 Cable<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong><br />

3. Connect the Parallel Dongle to the Parallel I/F Cable.<br />

PC<br />

19519<br />

Parallel<br />

Dongle<br />

25-pin<br />

D-Shell<br />

Receptacle<br />

497-0411000<br />

28-pin<br />

Sub-Miniature<br />

D-Plug<br />

Parallel<br />

Port<br />

4. Boot the PC in the DOS mode with CD‐ROM support.<br />

Note: The PC must be running in the DOS mode (not in a<br />

Windows DOS box) for the software to operate correctly.<br />

16992


Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures 7-7<br />

5. Insert the BIOS update CD into the PC.<br />

NCR BIOS and BIOS Update Software<br />

LPIN: A370‐0022‐0100<br />

6. Apply power to the terminal.<br />

7. On the PC, change directory to the CD‐ROM drive.<br />

E: [Enter]<br />

8. Enter the update command:<br />

EMBflash [Enter]<br />

9. Select the number for the <strong>7401</strong> terminal from the menu list:<br />

1) 7454<br />

2) <strong>7401</strong><br />

3) 7452<br />

4) 7453<br />

5) 7455<br />

6) 7460<br />

7) 7451<br />

8) 7456<br />

2 [Enter]<br />

A blue screen displays as the program runs, showing the program<br />

progress, followed by a green screen, indicating a successful load.<br />

PhoenixPhlash Status<br />

Flash memory has been successfully programmed<br />

PRESS ANY KEY TO EXIT<br />

19502<br />

The Class/Model/Serial # information is deleted using the Crisis<br />

Recovery procedure. Use the normal BIOS update procedures, as<br />

discussed earlier in this chapter, to restore the information.


7-8 Chapter 7: BIOS Updating Procedures<br />

Cable/Connector Pin-Out Information<br />

Parallel Dongle<br />

25-Pin D-shell Receptacle<br />

(Viewed from wiring side)<br />

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1<br />

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14<br />

19513<br />

RS-232 Cable<br />

P1<br />

P2<br />

5<br />

9<br />

1<br />

6<br />

9-Pin<br />

D-shell<br />

Receptacle<br />

1<br />

1<br />

9-Pin<br />

D-shell<br />

Receptacle<br />

5<br />

9<br />

1<br />

6<br />

2<br />

2<br />

3<br />

3<br />

4<br />

4<br />

5<br />

5<br />

6<br />

6<br />

7<br />

7<br />

8<br />

8<br />

P1<br />

P2<br />

19512


Chapter 8: NCR <strong>7401</strong> 7890/7892 Scanner<br />

Differences<br />

Introduction<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> integrated scanner module is a modified NCR 7890<br />

Presentation Scanner or a NCR 7892 Bi‐Modal Presentation Scanner;<br />

however, there are a few differences to be aware of.<br />

1. The <strong>7401</strong> Scanner does not have its own integrated motion detector,<br />

as does the NCR 7890 and NCR 7892 Scanners.<br />

2. The Scanner Programming Tags should only be used to set <strong>7401</strong><br />

Scanner factory defaults. Modify additional settings using the NCR<br />

OPOS Programming Sequence function.<br />

3. The defaults used with the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner are different from the<br />

standard NCR 7890 and NCR 7892 defaults.<br />

Application developers who are integrating the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner should<br />

obtain a copy of the following <strong>doc</strong>uments:<br />

• NCR 7890 Presentation Scanner Userʹs Guide (BD20‐0901‐A)<br />

• NCR 7892 Bi‐Modal Presentation Scanner User Guide (B005‐0000‐1192)<br />

• NCR Scanner/Scale Interface Programmerʹs Guide (BD20‐1074‐A)<br />

• NCR Scanner Programming Tags (BST0‐2121‐74)<br />

These <strong>doc</strong>uments are available on the Information Products Publishing<br />

(IPP) web site at http://www.info.<strong>ncr</strong>.com/.


8-2 Chapter 8: NCR <strong>7401</strong> 7890/7892 Scanner Differences<br />

Starting the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner Motor and Laser<br />

The NCR 7890 and NCR 7892 Scanners have a built‐in detector that<br />

senses when an object is in front of the unit. When an object is detected,<br />

it turns the laser and motor on so it can scan. This detector is provided<br />

so the scanner can be put into a low‐power‐consumption state when<br />

the unit is not in use, permitting the scanner to last longer and use less<br />

power.<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> Scanner does not have a detector, but it does turn off the<br />

motor and laser after a programmable period of time called the Active<br />

Time. This period of time is from when the motor and laser are first<br />

started until they are automatically turned off. The Active Time is set<br />

by default to 20 seconds for the 7890 and 7892 Scanner; to 30 seconds<br />

for the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner.<br />

NCR OPOS and the FitClient platform handle the lack of an integrated<br />

motion detector by using the <strong>7401</strong>ʹs motion detector located under the<br />

LCD screen. The NCR OPOS driver receives information (events) from<br />

the motion detector on the front of the <strong>7401</strong> to determine when the<br />

scanner should be started.<br />

Note: This detector, although good at detecting someone walking up<br />

to the <strong>7401</strong>, may not detect someone who has been standing in front of<br />

the <strong>7401</strong> for a while and then presenting an item below the <strong>7401</strong><br />

Scanner for reading.


Chapter 8: NCR <strong>7401</strong> 7890/7892 Scanner Differences 8-3<br />

After the Active Time period expires, if the NCR OPOS scanner driver<br />

does not get another motion event, the motor and laser are turned off.<br />

If a motion event is received during the Active Time period, the motor<br />

and laser will continue to run and the timer is restarted. The<br />

application using NCR OPOS should keep track of the motion<br />

detection events (and the time since the last event) to ensure that the<br />

scanner is running when the application is requesting scanner input. If<br />

no motion events are received before the Active Time period expires,<br />

and a transaction is still active, the application must either restart the<br />

scanner or perform some other recovery procedure, such as asking the<br />

customer if they still want the same service performed. These<br />

procedures should be well designed and tested so that the customer is<br />

not attempting to scan an item when the motor and laser are off.<br />

The motion events are <strong>doc</strong>umented in the NCR OPOS Online Help file<br />

that comes with the NCR OPOS software. The help file is also available<br />

on the IPP web site (search for a Title containing OPOS). Use of the<br />

motion detector without using the NCR OPOS drivers is not<br />

recommended and is currently not <strong>doc</strong>umented.<br />

If the application is not using NCR OPOS, it must prepare the scanner<br />

to read using the Enable Scanner command and the Start Scanner<br />

command sequences. These commands are the same as the 7890 and<br />

7892 commands as <strong>doc</strong>umented in the NCR Scanner/Scale Interface<br />

Programmer’s Guide.<br />

Once the Start Command is successfully issued, the motor and laser are<br />

turned on for the Active Time period. The application should keep<br />

track of the time so that at the end of the Active Time period, the Start<br />

command is re‐issued or some other procedure is performed to<br />

continue the transaction. As noted in the OPOS paragraph above, the<br />

design of these procedures should be carefully considered to limit<br />

customer frustration.


8-4 Chapter 8: NCR <strong>7401</strong> 7890/7892 Scanner Differences<br />

Programming the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner Using Programming Tags<br />

Obtain the following Scanner Programming Tags (BST0‐2121‐74):<br />

• Programming Mode<br />

• Hex 3<br />

• Hex 0<br />

• Hex 7<br />

• Save and Reset<br />

• Default<br />

1. Power cycle the <strong>7401</strong> terminal.<br />

2. Listen for the Scanner power‐up tone. Immediately scan the<br />

Default Scanner Programming Tag.<br />

Note: If a keyboard is attached, the Pause key may be pressed to<br />

delay terminal restart until scanner testing is complete. Terminal<br />

restart can be resumed by pressing any key.<br />

3. Listen closely to the scanner beep sequence returned from scanning<br />

the Default Programming Tag.<br />

4. If four (4) short and three (3) long beeps are heard, the scanner is<br />

programmed with <strong>7401</strong> default settings and no further action is<br />

necessary. If beeps returned are something other than four (4) short<br />

and three (3) long, proceed to step 5.<br />

5. Scan the Scanner Programming Tags in the following order:<br />

‐ Programming Mode<br />

‐ Hex 3<br />

‐ Hex 0<br />

‐ Hex 7<br />

‐ Save and Reset<br />

6. Scan the Default tag again to verify correct <strong>7401</strong> scanner setting of<br />

four (4) short followed by three (3) long beeps.


Chapter 8: NCR <strong>7401</strong> 7890/7892 Scanner Differences 8-5<br />

Programming the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner Through the RS-232 Interface<br />

As with the 7890 and 7892, the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner can be programmed<br />

through the RS‐232 interface. The 7890, 7892, and <strong>7401</strong> Scanners have a<br />

Program command (33h 45h) which permits you to send the tag<br />

information through the communications port (COM1 on the <strong>7401</strong>).<br />

Send the same sequences that would be input using the tags. See the<br />

NCR Scanner/Scale Interface Programmerʹs Guide for more information.<br />

The Disable command must be sent to the scanner before the Program<br />

command is sent.<br />

The default for the message format is the same for the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner as<br />

it is for the 7890 and 7892 Scanners. There is no Start sentinel, and no<br />

BCC is used. The command is issued followed by the End sentinel<br />

which is an ETX (End of Text) character (03h). For example, the Start<br />

command is issued as 33h 38h 03h or ASCII: 3 8 ETX.


8-6 Chapter 8: NCR <strong>7401</strong> 7890/7892 Scanner Differences<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Scanner Default Settings<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> Scanner is set up in manufacturing using an additional string<br />

of commands to change some of the default settings that are provided<br />

with the 7890 and 7892 scanners. Refer to the 7890 and 7892 <strong>doc</strong>uments<br />

for the complete list of defaults.<br />

The defaults specifically programmed for the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner are listed<br />

below. These defaults are different from the 7890 and 7892 defaults.<br />

Hex Command<br />

ASCII<br />

Command<br />

Command Description<br />

31h, 30h, 35h, 1, 0, 5 Select RS‐232<br />

protocol<br />

Comments<br />

The <strong>7401</strong> Scanner can<br />

only be used on an<br />

RS‐232 connection.<br />

31h, 34h, 30h, 1, 4, 0 Disable Code 39 Enable with 1, 4, A, 1<br />

31h, 35h, 30h, 1, 5, 0 Disable Interleaved<br />

2 of 5<br />

Enable with 1, 5, A, 1<br />

31h, 37h, 30h, 1, 7, 0 Disable Code 128 Enable with 1, 7, A, 1<br />

31h, 31h, 30h, 1, 1, 0 Disable Good Read<br />

Tone<br />

31h, 32h, 43h, 35h 1, 2, C, 5 30 Second Active<br />

Time<br />

Enable with 1, 1, A, 1<br />

Other times can be<br />

programmed; see the<br />

7890 programming<br />

books.


Appendix A: Cables<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Cables<br />

Corporate ID Part Number Description<br />

1416‐C041‐0030 497‐0008623 Ethernet 10/100BaseT<br />

1416‐C266‐0040 497‐0407943 9‐pin female to 9‐pin female RS‐232<br />

1416‐C266‐0152 497‐0409379 7193 RS‐232 50 foot 9‐pin female to 9‐pin<br />

female<br />

1416‐C320‐0030 006‐8601011 Printer Power, SEV, straight receptacle<br />

1416‐C321‐0030 006‐8601012 Printer Power, UK, straight receptacle<br />

1416‐C322‐0030 006‐8601019 Printer Power, Australian, straight<br />

receptacle<br />

1416‐C323‐0030 006‐8601010 Printer Power, International, straight<br />

receptacle<br />

1416‐C325‐0030 006‐1009037 Printer Power, US, straight receptacle<br />

1416‐C337‐0010 497‐0407427 RS‐232 interface, integrated<br />

1416‐C337‐0040 497‐0407429 RS‐232 interface, remote<br />

1416‐C337‐0152 497‐0407430 RS‐232 interface 50 foot<br />

1416‐C359‐0007 497‐0408349 9‐pin female to 9‐pin female RS‐232 (27ʺ)<br />

1416‐C373‐0080 497‐0409432 25 foot cable<br />

1416‐C374‐0040 497‐0409433 14 foot cable<br />

1416‐C408‐0030 230‐0113955 Power, SEV, right angle receptacle<br />

1416‐C409‐0030 230‐0113956 Power, UK rectangular, right angle<br />

receptacle


A-2 Appendix A: Cables<br />

Corporate ID Part Number Description<br />

1416‐C411‐0030 006‐1012224 Power, international, right angle<br />

receptacle<br />

1416‐C417‐0040 497‐0411815 Printer extender, 9‐pin female to 25‐pin<br />

female<br />

1416‐C418‐0040 497‐0411816 Printer extender, 25‐pin male to 25‐pin<br />

female<br />

1416‐C419‐0030 250‐0023191 Power, 120 V twist lock, right angle<br />

receptacle<br />

1416‐C464‐0006 497‐0413011 CD‐ROM<br />

1416‐C472‐0006 497‐0411000 Parallel interface<br />

1416‐C528‐0010 497‐0415949 USB, 1 meter<br />

1416‐C528‐0040 497‐0415950 USB, 4 meter


Appendix B: Feature Kits<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Kits<br />

Below is a comprehensive list of the optional hardware Feature Kits<br />

that can be installed in the customer environment. Kit installation<br />

instructions (for those requiring instruction) are available on the<br />

Information Products web sites.<br />

• NCR Intranet: http://inforetail.atlantaga.<strong>ncr</strong>.com<br />

• Internet: http://www.info.<strong>ncr</strong>.com<br />

To locate the installation guides on these sites:<br />

1. Select General Search.<br />

2. Select the Kit Instructions icon.<br />

3. In the Kit Title field, enter the Kit Title.<br />

Example: MSR<br />

or<br />

In the Kit Number field, enter the Kit Number.<br />

Example: <strong>7401</strong>‐K103<br />

4. Select Search<br />

The file can be viewed online by left‐mouse clicking on the pub<br />

title, or if you prefer to download the entire file you can rightmouse<br />

click on the title then select the Save Target as... option.<br />

If you aren’t sure of the title of number you can display all kits<br />

associated with a terminal product class by:<br />

1. In the Class drop‐down list, select the Class of the terminal.<br />

Example: <strong>7401</strong>


B-2 Appendix B: Feature Kits<br />

2. Select Search.<br />

Kit Number Part Number Description<br />

2336‐K001‐V001 497‐0411988 Ethernet to RS‐232 port server<br />

2336‐K007‐V001 497‐0413163 External CD‐ROM<br />

2336‐K008‐V001 497‐0413014 USB to RS‐232 port server<br />

2336‐K012‐V001 497‐0413710 USB to RS‐232 2‐port server<br />

2336‐K016‐V001 230‐0145388 Hand‐held scanner (12 V power)<br />

2336‐K019‐V001 497‐0417069 Mouse, RS‐232<br />

2336‐K020‐V001 006‐8603087 Keyboard with trackball<br />

2336‐K021‐V001 006‐8603088 Serial to mouse adapter for<br />

keyboard with trackball<br />

2336‐K033‐V001 497‐0417357 Modem ‐ PCMCIA 56 kB<br />

2336‐K037‐V001 497‐0419664 Pedestal Kit ‐ Wide keyboard Tray<br />

2336‐K051‐V001 497‐0422195 <strong>7401</strong> Printer Blank<br />

2336‐K052‐V001 497‐0422194 <strong>7401</strong> Floor Standing Pedestal<br />

2336‐K100‐V001 497‐0421335 Keyboard, Black, 83‐key, compact<br />

w/trackball<br />

2336‐K101‐V001 497‐0421339 PS/2 to Serial Adapter<br />

2336‐K206‐V001<br />

2336‐K207‐V001<br />

Swedish/Finnish Rugged Keyboard<br />

Italian Rugged Keyboard<br />

2337‐K010‐V001 497‐0417702 Bravo 4‐label printer (US cord,<br />

without label peeler)<br />

2337‐K011‐V001 497‐0417703 Bravo 4‐label printer (US cord,<br />

with label peeler)


Appendix B: Feature Kits B-3<br />

Kit Number Part Number Description<br />

2337‐K012‐V001 497‐0417705 Bravo 4‐label printer (EC cord,<br />

without label peeler)<br />

2337‐K013‐V001 497‐0417708 Bravo 4‐label printer (EC cord,<br />

with label peeler)<br />

2337‐K014‐V001 497‐0417709 Bravo 4‐label printer (UK cord,<br />

without label peeler)<br />

2337‐K015‐V001 497‐0417710 Bravo 4‐label printer (UK cord,<br />

with label peeler)<br />

2756‐K121‐V001 497‐0409421 Domestic power supply<br />

2756‐K122‐V001 497‐0409434 Y‐cable adapter (mouse/keypad)<br />

2756‐K124‐V001 497‐0409422 International power supply<br />

5945‐K010‐V002 497‐0414162 Cable – 4 M RS‐232 (9‐pin D shell)<br />

5945‐K012‐V001 497‐0414163 Cable – 8 M RS‐232 (9‐pin D shell)<br />

5945‐K020‐V001 497‐0412046 Power supply (120 V, 60 Hz,<br />

US/Can)<br />

5945‐K025‐V001 497‐0412800 Power supply (220‐240 V, 50 Hz)<br />

5945‐K030‐V001 497‐0412047 Generic keyboard overlay<br />

5945‐K100‐V004 497‐0416165 Electronic payment terminal with<br />

2 track MSR<br />

5945‐K300‐V004 497‐0416166 Electronic payment terminal with<br />

3 track MSR<br />

5992‐K095‐V001 497‐0412211 Stylus<br />

5992‐K100‐V008 497‐0417677 Signature capture plus with 2 track<br />

MSR<br />

7156‐K270‐V001 497‐0408657 Switch button (20 pieces )


B-4 Appendix B: Feature Kits<br />

Kit Number Part Number Description<br />

7156‐K280‐V001 497‐0408653 Slip table<br />

7156‐K301‐V002 497‐0408654 Power supply<br />

7156‐K309‐V001<br />

Mounting Bracket<br />

7156‐K330‐V002 497‐0408656 Power supply (w/US power cord)<br />

7158‐K301‐V001 497‐0411975 Power supply (55 W)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K016‐V001 497‐0421022 600 MHz Celeron processor<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K023‐V001 497‐0413159 128 MB memory<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K024‐V001 497‐0414201 64 MB SDRAM service kit<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K025‐V001 497‐0414202 128 MB SDRAM service kit<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K030‐V001 497‐0412201 POS connector board<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K031‐V001 497‐0414185 Adapter board kit<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K040‐V001 497‐0420672 16 MB Flash Disk<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K050‐V001 497‐0419933 Standard capacity hard drive<br />

(10 GB)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K051‐V001 497‐0413160 Large capacity hard drive (20 GB)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K059‐V001 497‐0421025 Integrated CD‐ROM<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K060‐V001 497‐0412202 Dual PCMCIA port<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K070‐V001 497‐0416029 Dual RS‐232 (Pentium III only)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K071‐V001 497‐0416030 S‐Video port<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K075‐V001 497‐0427095 USB Camera for <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K103‐V001 497‐0425057 MSR, 3 Track ISO, Angled (Model<br />

45xx)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K200‐V001 497‐0412200 High fidelity speaker module


Appendix B: Feature Kits B-5<br />

Kit Number Part Number Description<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K201‐V001 497‐0420675 Hi fi speaker module w/IRDA<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K501‐V001 497‐0412157 Fixed‐angle to tilt mount conversion<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K502‐V001 497‐0420092 Kit ‐ Flush Mount<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K503‐V001 497‐0412158 Fixed‐angle mount<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K504‐V001 497‐0420102 Fixed‐angle mount w/Keyboard Port<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K505‐V001<br />

Fixed Angle Mount II<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K509‐V001 497‐0415774 Kit – Rear Cover for Fixed Angle<br />

Mount<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K512‐V001 497‐0428826 Fixed Angle Mount II with 7892<br />

Scanner<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K521‐V001 497‐0411711 Wall mount bracket<br />

(fixed‐angle mount)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K522‐V001 497‐0411712 Table mount bracket<br />

(fixed‐angle mount)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K523‐V001 497‐0412811 Wall mount (fixed‐angle<br />

mount/self‐service printer)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K525‐V001 497‐0416031 Fixed‐angle mount with <strong>7401</strong>‐K580<br />

printer<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K526‐V001 497‐0424762 Fixed‐angle mount with <strong>7401</strong>‐K592<br />

printer (Black)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K530‐V001 497‐0416032 Pole mount kit for <strong>7401</strong>‐K525<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K533‐V001 497‐0411713 Wall mount bracket (tilt mount)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K534‐V001 497‐0419085 Swivel mount bracket<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K535‐V001 497‐0421099 Countertop swivel mount bracket<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K536‐V001 497‐0420974 Fixed‐angle mount tilt bracket


B-6 Appendix B: Feature Kits<br />

Kit Number Part Number Description<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K540‐V001 497‐0414186 Wall mount bracket with keyboard<br />

shelf<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K542‐V001 497‐0414279 Tilt mount bracket for keyboard<br />

shelf<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K543‐V001 497‐0417684 Wall mount bracket with keyboard<br />

shelf (wide)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K580‐V001 497‐0420105 Self‐service printer (80 mm)<br />

Discontinued<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K582‐V001 497‐0420820 Self‐service printer (K582)<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐K590‐V004 497‐0424497 Self‐service printer<br />

(80, 82.5, 114 mm)<br />

7454‐K101‐V002 497‐0412005 MSR 3 track ISO<br />

7454‐K102‐V001 497‐0412299 MSR JIS 2 track<br />

7455‐K026‐V001 497‐0423400 256 KB SDRAM Kit<br />

7949‐K033‐V001 497‐418574 Pedestal – Straight Base<br />

7949‐K034‐V001 497‐418575 Pedestal – Curved Base<br />

7949‐K035‐V001 497‐418576 Pedestal – No Printer Option


Index<br />

—1—<br />

12.1 inch LCD No‐Cabinet Feature, 3‐37<br />

15 inch LCD No‐Cabinet Feature, 3‐40<br />

—4—<br />

4055 Uninterruptible Power System<br />

(UPS), 3‐43, 4‐22<br />

—7—<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Cables, A‐1<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Kits, B‐1<br />

<strong>7401</strong> Scanner Default Settings, 8‐6<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx Model Numbers, 2‐2<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx Printer<br />

Full page printer diagnostics and setup,<br />

4‐17<br />

Loading the paper, 4‐13<br />

Removing paper from the paper feed<br />

rolls, 4‐14<br />

Removing power from the printer, 4‐14<br />

Using the printer test and display<br />

panel, 4‐15<br />

—A—<br />

ACPI, 0‐38, 2‐22<br />

Advance Configuration Power Interface,<br />

0‐38, 2‐22<br />

Advanced Power Management, 0‐37<br />

Allocating interrupts, 5‐7<br />

APM, 0‐37<br />

Audio, 0‐28, 2‐13<br />

Auto‐Logon<br />

setting, 3‐49<br />

—B—<br />

BIOS Configuring a hard drive, 5‐5<br />

BIOS crisis recovery, 7‐5<br />

BIOS Default CMOS Values (<strong>7401</strong>‐<br />

26xx/46xx BIOS), 5‐18<br />

BIOS Default CMOS Values (Pentium<br />

III/Celeron), 5‐8<br />

BIOS Default CMOS values (Pentium), 5‐<br />

28<br />

BIOS Recovery<br />

crisis recovery procedures, 7‐5<br />

using CD‐ROM, 7‐1<br />

BIOS Setup<br />

Allocating interrupts, 5‐7<br />

Default factory settings, 5‐7<br />

Entering Setup with a keyboard, 5‐2<br />

Entering Setup without a keyboard, 5‐1<br />

How to select menu options, 5‐3


Index-2<br />

Setting boot options, 5‐6<br />

Setting memory cache, 5‐5<br />

Setting memory shadow, 5‐6<br />

Setting passrods, 5‐4<br />

Setting the date and time, 5‐3<br />

Boot options, setting, 5‐6<br />

—C—<br />

Cable connector identification, 3‐9, 4‐5<br />

Calibrating the Touch Screen, 4‐27<br />

Calibration from the BIOS, 4‐30<br />

Calibration Using Microcal (DOS), 4‐29<br />

Calibration Using MicroTouch<br />

(Windows), 4‐27<br />

Cash drawer<br />

Installation, 3‐16, 3‐17<br />

Cash Drawer Support, 0‐31<br />

CD‐ROM drive, 0‐52<br />

Clearing password, 5‐4<br />

Compact Flash, 0‐50, 2‐30<br />

Compatibility, 0‐54<br />

Completing the OS Installation<br />

(Win2000), 3‐46, 4‐24<br />

Completing the OS Installation (Win98),<br />

3‐48, 4‐26<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinNT),<br />

3‐47, 4‐25<br />

Completing the OS Installation (WinXPe),<br />

3‐46, 4‐24<br />

Configuring <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx with U.K.<br />

keyboard, 4‐1<br />

Configuring a hard drive, 5‐5<br />

Configuring the Power Mon II®<br />

Software, 3‐45<br />

Country keyboards, 4‐6, 4‐8<br />

—D—<br />

Date and time, setting, 5‐3<br />

dual display implementation, 0‐35, 2‐19<br />

—E—<br />

EasyPoint 45 Pedestal, 2‐34<br />

Ethernet 10/100Base‐T, 0‐23, 2‐8<br />

—F—<br />

Finalizing the Installation<br />

7454‐2xxx and 3xxx, 3‐46<br />

7454‐4xxx, 4‐24<br />

Flash disk interface, 0‐30, 2‐15<br />

FLASH memory implementation, 0‐36, 2‐<br />

20<br />

Full page printer diagnostics and setup<br />

(<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx printer), 4‐17<br />

—G—<br />

Gold Disk Contents, 6‐8<br />

Graphics subsystem, 0‐33, 2‐16<br />

—H—<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d disk drive, 0‐46, 2‐29<br />

<strong>Har</strong>d drive, configuring, 5‐5<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware monitor, 0‐27, 2‐12<br />

<strong>Har</strong>dware options, 0‐16, 2‐4<br />

Installation<br />

—I—


Index-3<br />

<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx peripherals, 4‐6<br />

Angled Magnetic Stripe Reader (MSR),<br />

4‐7<br />

Country Keyboards (<strong>7401</strong>‐F118), 4‐8<br />

Fixed‐Angle mount, 3‐5<br />

Tilt Mount, 3‐10<br />

Installing a <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx on a Table Mount,<br />

4‐18<br />

Installing a <strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx on the EasyPoint 45<br />

Pedestal, 4‐21<br />

Installing the Power Mon II® Software, 3‐<br />

44<br />

Installing the UPS, 3‐44<br />

Integrated CD‐ROM, 2‐29<br />

Internal speaker, 0‐47, 2‐30<br />

Interrupts (<strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx BIOS), 5‐26<br />

Interrupts (Pentium III/Celeron), 5‐16<br />

Interrupts (Pentium), 5‐31<br />

Interrupts, allocating, 5‐7<br />

ISA interrupts, 5‐7<br />

—K—<br />

Kit Configuration Diagram, 0‐20<br />

—L—<br />

LAN status LEDs, 0‐49, 2‐32<br />

LCD adapter board, 0‐40, 2‐23<br />

LCD backlight inverter module, 0‐40, 2‐24<br />

—M—<br />

Magnetic stripe reader, 0‐29, 0‐33, 2‐14, 2‐<br />

16<br />

Magnetic Stripe Reader, 2‐27<br />

Memory cache, setting, 5‐5<br />

Memory Map (<strong>7401</strong>‐26xx/46xx BIOS), 5‐<br />

27<br />

Memory Map (Pentium III/Celeron), 5‐17<br />

Memory Map (Pentium), 5‐32<br />

Memory shadow, setting, 5‐6<br />

MicroTouch Touchscreen, 3‐56, 4‐27<br />

Migration<br />

retail applications, 0‐55<br />

retail peripherals, 0‐55<br />

retail systems, 0‐56<br />

Model number, 0‐12, 2‐2<br />

Model Numbers, 0‐14<br />

Motion sensor, 0‐47, 2‐31<br />

Motorized Card Reader, 2‐27<br />

Mounting a Fixed‐Angle Mount<br />

Terminal, 3‐21<br />

Mounting the terminal<br />

Tilt mount, 3‐33<br />

Wall mount, 3‐24, 3‐26<br />

Wall mount – core module, 3‐35<br />

MSR, 0‐29, 0‐33, 2‐14, 2‐16<br />

—N—<br />

NCR <strong>7401</strong>/7890 or 7892 Scanner<br />

Differences, 8‐1<br />

—O—<br />

Operating System Recovery<br />

using CD‐ROM, 6‐1<br />

Operating System Restrictions, 6‐9<br />

Operator display<br />

Description, 0‐40, 2‐23


Index-4<br />

OS Recovery from a Larger Disk Image,<br />

6‐29<br />

—P—<br />

Password<br />

Clearing, 5‐4<br />

Password setup, 5‐4<br />

PCI expansion header, 0‐27, 2‐12<br />

Pentium III connectors, 0‐53<br />

Pin Pad, 2‐26<br />

Plug and Play, 0‐37, 2‐21<br />

POS connector board, 0‐47, 2‐30<br />

Features, 0‐16, 2‐3<br />

Power LED, 0‐33, 2‐16<br />

Power OK LED, 0‐48, 2‐32<br />

Power supply<br />

Description, 0‐49, 2‐32, 2‐33<br />

Power/status LED, 0‐48, 2‐31<br />

Printer Installation, 3‐13<br />

Printers, 0‐43<br />

Processor board<br />

Connector descriptions, 0‐30, 2‐15<br />

Features, 0‐15, 2‐3<br />

Processor Board<br />

Description, 0‐21, 2‐7<br />

Processor/Chip Set, 0‐21, 2‐7<br />

Programming the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner<br />

Through the RS‐232 Interface, 8‐5<br />

Using Programming Tags, 8‐4<br />

—R—<br />

Removing paper from the paper feed<br />

rolls (<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx printer), 4‐14<br />

Removing power from the printer (<strong>7401</strong>‐<br />

4xxx printer), 4‐14<br />

Reset switch, 0‐46, 2‐29<br />

Resolutions supported, 0‐35, 2‐17<br />

Ruggedized Keyboard with Trackball, 2‐<br />

26<br />

—S—<br />

Scanner module, 0‐50<br />

Secure Cabinet with Integrated Speakers,<br />

2‐25<br />

serial mouse<br />

installation, 3‐54<br />

Serial number, 0‐12, 2‐2<br />

Serial ports, 0‐26, 2‐11<br />

Setting<br />

Boot options, 5‐6<br />

Memory cache, 5‐5<br />

Memory shadow, 5‐6<br />

Setting time and date, 5‐3<br />

Setup utility, 0‐37, 2‐21<br />

Speaker module, 0‐50, 2‐33<br />

Standby and Hibernate Mode Restriction,<br />

6‐9<br />

Starting the <strong>7401</strong> Scanner Motor and<br />

Laser, 8‐2<br />

System Configuration Diagram, 0‐19, 2‐6<br />

—T—<br />

Terminal Components not Supported, 0‐<br />

18, 2‐5<br />

TFT (thin film transistor), 0‐22<br />

Time and date, setting, 5‐3<br />

Touch screen controller, 0‐29, 2‐14


Index-5<br />

—U—<br />

U.K. Keyboard Configuration, 4‐1<br />

Universal serial bus, 0‐26, 2‐11<br />

USB RS‐232 port server, 0‐51<br />

Using the Full Page Printer, 4‐13<br />

Using the printer test and display panel<br />

(<strong>7401</strong>‐4xxx printer), 4‐15<br />

—V—<br />

Video subsystem, 0‐22, 2‐8<br />

—W—<br />

Wireless LAN communications, 0‐25, 2‐10

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!